Purchases /visma-net-erp/help/purchases section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Purchases - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-overview page The Purchases workspace helps you organise and control the purchasing process, plan purchasing expenses, and reduce spending on goods and services. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases - overview The Purchases workspace helps you organise and control the purchasing process, plan purchasing expenses, and reduce spending on goods and services. The Purchases workspace helps you organise and control the purchasing process, plan purchasing expenses, and reduce spending on goods and services. Visma Net automates the purchasing process: issuing purchase orders, receiving orders, and creating purchase invoices. With the Purchases workspace, you gain complete visibility into the whole purchasing process, from planning purchases to paying the invoices. ## Multiple purchase order types The Purchases workspace supports the following purchase order types: **Normal**, **Drop shipment**, **Blanket**, and **Standard**. The functionalities that affect the list of order types (if not enabled) are: **Blanket and standard purchase orders** and **Drop shipments**. Orders of different types have different functionality and fulfilment flows; for instance, orders of the **Standard** type can be included in **Normal** orders. For more information, see: [About types of purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-types-of-purchase-orders/). ## Default settings Multiple default settings, if they hold the values your employees use most frequently, help users save time and avoid input errors during data entry. Some default settings are defined within the Purchases workspace, while others are defined in the workspaces that integrate closely with purchasing. Users can, of course, override these values at any time. For more information, see: [About purchasing-related defaults and overrides](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-purchasing-related-defaults-and-overrides/). ## Integration with Finance and Inventory Due to seamless integration of the workspaces in the Finance and Inventory modules, you can generate back orders, view item availability data, generate invoices for drop-ship orders, and view customer demand when you create purchase orders. You can automatically generate supplier ledger invoices and inventory receipts and issues. Such integration eliminates repetitive data entry and automates workflows for the complete purchasing cycle. ## Supplier catalogues To maintain up-to-date information on supplier prices in Visma Net, you can create supplier catalogues and update them periodically for each supplier. For updating, you can use information on released supplier documents or import supplier price lists. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can define price tiers for different quantities of the items purchased from a particular supplier. Also, you can specify minimum and maximum order quantities, lot sizes, alternative IDs used by suppliers for products they sell, and other related information. For more details, see [About supplier catalogues.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-supplier-catalogues/) ## Supplier prices and discounts By maintaining supplier discounts and prices in the system, you can take advantage of quantity pricing offers from the suppliers and effectively plan your purchases. In Visma Net, you can enter and maintain the supplier discounts that the system applies automatically to each purchase order or invoice if the **Supplier discounts** functionality is enabled. Supplier prices and discounts can be configured in the Supplier ledger workspace. ## Flexible approval procedures Most organisations require that purchase orders be approved by designated persons before they can be emailed or printed for sending by mail to the supplier. You can configure the approval process with approvals to be performed in parallel by multiple employees or in multiple successive stages. The rules for automatic assignment of orders for approval can be based on the type of order, supplier information, order amount, and other order-specific information. ## Processing of drop-ship orders Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. The quantities of stock items on drop-ship orders do not update the item availability data in the Inventory workspace. The functionality that allows processing of drop-ship orders is available only if the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For details, see: [Create a drop-ship order flow.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow/) ## Processing of returns For damaged goods or services not rendered, you can create returns. To a return, you can add a purchase order, add order lines, or specify the items with their quantities manually. You can configure the system on release of returns to automatically create Inventory issues for stock items. Further processing of returns depend on the policies established in your company: You can choose whether to create a purchase credit note and later apply it against a refund or against other invoices, or to later create a new receipt for replacements of damaged items. For details, see: [About return processing options.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-return-processing-options/) ## Support of collect on delivery purchases The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as **cash on delivery (COD)** or (because there are multiple possible methods of payment) **collect on delivery (COD)**. Visma Net provides you with the functionality that you can use to account for payments made on delivery. For information on a workflow used for processing COD transactions, see: [Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-a-cash-on-delivery-cod-transaction/) ## Landed cost tracking By using the Purchases workspace, you can account for additional costs that your company can incur in the process of purchasing goods, such as transportation costs, VAT, shipment insurances, and other charges. For information about how landed costs are processed in Visma Net, see: [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). ## Bar code support Scanning product bar codes on receipt of goods to warehouses simplifies data entry. By using warehouse and location IDs printed as bar codes and scanned on data entry, you can more easily maintain correct item allocation data, which helps your employees effectively fulfil orders. For more information, see: [About bar code support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-barcode-support/). ## Inclusive VAT support In Visma Net, you can configure automatic calculation of value-added taxes (VATs) included in item prices. This functionality is only available if the **VAT reporting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. VAT amounts will be calculated appropriately, recorded to proper VAT claimable accounts, and excluded from item costs. For details, see: [About inclusive VAT support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-inclusive-vat-support/). ## Audit trail The Purchases workspace provides a complete audit trail of all purchasing transactions. After a transaction is released, it cannot be deleted; to correct mistakes, you must enter a transaction to reverse the incorrect entry. The system keeps the details of all purchasing transactions, including information about users who entered, approved, and modified records. Also, you can attach scanned copies of original documents and notes directly to the documents. ## Other functionalities and options The Purchases workspace also offers the following functionalities: + Integration with the Inventory workspace: You can purchase goods for inventory, and when the goods are received at the warehouse and the purchase receipts are released, the system automatically generates inventory receipts. + The ability to attach scanned images of supplier documents or images of items received from supplier to receipts or returns. + The ability to add notes with handling instructions to receipts. + The option to link receipts to purchase orders or to specific lines of a purchase order to easily trace the process of purchase order fulfilment. + Support of non-stock items on purchase receipts. + Automatic conversion of units of measure (and resulting item costs). + The ability to specify service charges and shipping and handling fees on purchase orders and receipts. + Automatic printing of purchase orders to further send them to suppliers by mail, or automatic emailing of such orders. + Automatic update of item costs, depending on the valuation methods chosen for stock items, with supplier prices specified on purchase receipts. + Convenient display of item availability information in the window when users create purchase orders. + Automatic calculation of VAT on purchases, depending on the VAT zone of the shipping location. Manage defaults /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage defaults Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About purchasing-related defaults and overrides /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-purchasing-related-defaults-and-overrides page In the Purchases workspace of Visma Net, many elements in many windows may have default values. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchasing-related defaults and overrides In the Purchases workspace of Visma Net, many elements in many windows may have default values. In the Purchases workspace of Visma Net, many elements in many windows may have default values. If the default values you set are the values your organisation uses most frequently, your users will save time and minimise errors. You can override these values any time. Some default settings are defined within the Purchases workspace; others are defined in the workspaces that integrate closely with the Purchases workspace: Inventory and Supplier ledger. ## Default general ledger accounts To specify the default accounts for use in the Purchases workspace, use the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. These default accounts include the following ones: + Account and subaccount for freight expenses: You need to specify the account and subaccount for the freight expenses incurred in the delivery of purchased goods from suppliers. Enter the appropriate freight expense account and freight expense sub. values. + Accounts used for purchase return operations: You can define the accounts and subaccounts used for purchase return operations by assigning a specific reason code for purchase returns in the **Purchase order return reason code** field in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. Reason codes are defined in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. ## Workflow options The settings used to control workflow in the Purchases workspace include the following: Hold receipts on entry : Defines whether receipts get the **On hold** status by default when they are saved. Validate totals on entry : Defines whether totals are validated on entry for purchase receipts and for purchase orders of different types. Automatically create invoices on release : Defines whether supplier ledger invoices are created when receipts are released. Supplier price update : Defines how supplier prices are updated. They can be updated when receipts are created or released, when purchase orders are created, or when invoices are generated for receipts. Release supplier documents automatically : and **Release inventory documents automatically** Define whether Supplier ledger and Inventory documents generated for purchase receipts are automatically released. ## Supplier defaults Once you select a supplier on a new purchase order, many elements on the order get default values. These values, specified in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, are used as default values on data entry windows in the Supplier ledger and Purchases workspaces. These settings include the following: + The currency used by the supplier. The currency can be overridden on particular documents, if this is allowed by supplier settings located on the **General info** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + The payment terms. + The shipping terms. + The supplier's shipping location. + The carrier used by the supplier. + The supplier's contact information. + The payment settings used for payments made to suppliers. + General ledger accounts and subaccounts used to record expenses, freights, prepayments, and total liability. A supplier's default settings also include the VAT zone, which determines the taxes applicable to goods and services purchased from the supplier. You can also define the minimum and maximum percentage of ordered goods that can be accepted, and the actions to be performed if the ordered quantity differs from the received quantity when the quantities of received goods fall outside the specified range. ## Stock item defaults The stock item records provide default values for purchase orders and receipts, such as the units of measure, supplier prices, and accounts involved. You can also provide the item settings associated with the specific warehouse that is used in purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace, and in the inventory receipts automatically generated to update the costs and availability data of the item. The default settings for stock items are defined in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## Landed cost defaults Choosing a landed cost code on a document, you specify the appropriate supplier (which provides the services resulting in landed costs), application method, terms of payment, VAT category, and accounts involved in accounting for landed costs. Processing the landed costs results in cost adjustments for the stock items that were listed on receipts or supplier ledger invoices with landed costs specified. You define the landed cost settings in the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window. For more information about the landed costs, see: [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). About inclusive VAT support /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-inclusive-vat-support page The Purchases workspace supports value added taxes (VATs) on purchased items if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About inclusive VAT support The Purchases workspace supports value added taxes (VATs) on purchased items if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). In most European countries, where value added taxes are often used, prices for consumers are VAT-inclusive or specified with the VAT amount included. The base and sale prices, too, can be specified as including or excluding the appropriate VAT amount. You configure inclusive and non-inclusive taxes in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. For inclusive taxes, select the **Extract from item amount** option. In the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, the document details include applicable VAT shown for informational purposes on the **VAT details** tab; the list of applicable VAT includes the VAT present in both the supplier VAT zone and the ordered item's VAT category. In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, VAT amounts are calculated because even though value-added taxes for stock items are paid to suppliers, they are claimable from the tax agency. ## Example of inclusive VAT processing Consider an example in which a company purchases 100 motherboards at €22 each with a 10% VAT included. The total amount is €2200, and the VAT amount calculated for the document is €200. The following transactions will be generated for the Inventory receipt. |Account|Credit|Debit| |---|---|---| |Inventory (components)|0|2200 – 200 = 2000| |Purchase accrual|2000|0| The following transactions will be generated for the supplier ledger invoice receipt. |Account|Credit|Debit| |---|---|---| |Purchase accrual|0|2000 (accrued amount)| |Supplier ledger|2200 (full receipt amount)|0| |VAT claimable account|0|200| If any difference arises due to rounding between the original receipt amount, the sum of the VAT amount, and the amount to be recorded to the accrual account, it will be added to the purchase price variance account.

Related pages

Windows

Manage supplier catalogues /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage supplier catalogues Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About supplier catalogues /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-supplier-catalogues page In Visma Net, you can create and maintain supplier catalogues or the lists of supplier's stock items you purchase from your suppliers, along with the last prices of items and purchasing information about the items, which is generally used for automated replenishment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier catalogues In Visma Net, you can create and maintain supplier catalogues or the lists of supplier's stock items you purchase from your suppliers, along with the last prices of items and purchasing information about the items, which is generally used for automated replenishment. In Visma Net, you can create and maintain supplier catalogues or the lists of supplier's stock items you purchase from your suppliers, along with the last prices of items and purchasing information about the items, which is generally used for automated replenishment. By maintaining supplier catalogues, you can more efficiently select suppliers that sell specific types of items. You can also reduce errors on purchase orders by using supplier-specific alternative IDs of items. ## Creating supplier catalogues To create supplier catalogues, you use the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window. On this window, you can select a supplier and supplier location and create a list of items your company can purchase from this supplier location. For each item, you can specify the following information, some of which may be specific to the supplier location: + The supplier item ID, which is the identifier used by the supplier for the item. This alternative item ID can be assigned to the item. + The unit of measure (UoM) used by the supplier as the sales unit for the item at this location (defined as the item's **purchase unit** in your organisation). + The economic order quantity, which represents the quantity of this item that minimises the costs of ordering from this supplier location. + The Shipment lead time (days) (if any) for the stock item purchased from the supplier. The system uses the additional shipment lead time to schedule the purchases from the supplier and calculate the promised date. The system automatically calculates the promised date by adding the lead time and additional lead time (if any was specified for the item) to the requested date. + The purchasing information, which is used in automated replenishment: + The minimum frequency of orders. + The lot size defined for the item if it is tracked by lot numbers. + The minimum and maximum quantity that window the range in which the order quantity must fall You cannot enter the prices in the **Last supplier price** column. The column is populated and updated automatically by the prices that were last used for the items. For details on setting up automatic price updating, see the following section. Instead of entering all the items for each supplier and location, you can populate the supplier catalogues by creating a list of possible suppliers for each stock item by using the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and for each non-stock item by using the same-name tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Then, when you open the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window and select a supplier, you can view the stock and non-stock items that the supplier sells and modify this list if needed. ## Catalogue updating from supplier documents You can update the supplier catalogues manually at any time by replacing any changed data, such as alternative item IDs, economic order quantities (EOQs), lot sizes, and minimum and maximum quantities, with the newer and more correct data. However, the last used prices in the catalogues cannot be entered manually; the system updates these prices automatically from prices quoted on supplier documents. You can set up automatic updating of the last used supplier prices in the supplier catalogue based on the entry or release of specific supplier documents. To do this, in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, in the **Supplier price update** field, select one of the following options: + **On purchase order entry** + **On receipt entry** + **On receipt release** + **On purchase invoice release** + **None** When the event specified by the **Supplier price update** option (purchase order entry, purchase receipt entry, purchase receipt release, or release of an purchase invoice that is linked to a purchase receipt or order) occurs, the item's unit price from the document replaces the last price of the item with the same UoM in the supplier catalogue. If the UoM of the last price is the same as in the document, but the currency differs from the document's currency, the item's unit price in the document currency replaces the last price. If the UoM in the document line differs from the UoM of the last price, the system adds a new line to the supplier catalogue. The system does not keep the history of price changes in the supplier catalogue. If you do not want to maintain information about the last used prices in the supplier catalogues, select **None** as the **Supplier price update** option and the last used prices will not be updated. Note that in this case the last supplier price may be updated on release of a invoice that is not linked to any purchase order document. ## Using the prices from supplier catalogues If you regularly receive suppliers' price lists for all or most of their items, you can maintain supplier prices with much more flexibility by using the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) and the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. You can import the price lists, and calculate the updated prices by applying specific percentages. Maintaining supplier prices through supplier catalogues can also be useful for items for which the prices do not change often or information about prices is not available in advance. Once the system populates the **Last supplier price** column for items in the supplier catalogues, the system uses these last used prices as the default prices for the corresponding items on new purchase orders as follows: When you create a new purchase order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window or receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, if there are no prices listed for the item in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window, for each item, the system inserts the last price from the supplier catalogue as the supplier's default price (**Unit cost** in either window). If you are browsing the supplier catalogue in the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window in order to select a supplier for a specific item, you can view this supplier's current item prices by clicking the **Supplier prices** button on the table toolbar and navigating to the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. You can override the default catalogue prices on a purchase order or purchase receipt if the actual purchase prices for stock items are different from those listed in the supplier catalogue. In this case, the new prices that you enter will automatically appear in the supplier catalogue as the last used prices; the particular event triggering this update depends on the option selected in the **Supplier price update** field. The new prices will then appear on a new purchase order when a user creates it. However, if the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in your system, and you purchase different volumes with different prices from your suppliers, consider whether you need to maintain price updating in the catalogue, taking into account that you will not know what volume the price listed in the catalogue corresponds to.

Related pages

Windows

About barcode support /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-barcode-support page Bar code scanning saves you time when you receive goods to warehouses and increases overall control of operations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About barcode support Bar code scanning saves you time when you receive goods to warehouses and increases overall control of operations. Visma Net supports integration with bar code scanning solutions in the following ways: ## Bar codes as alternative IDs for items In Visma Net, you can use product bar codes as alternative identifiers for items. Enter bar codes for items in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the **Cross-references** tab, manually or by scanning them. The scanner's software converts the scanned bar code to an alphanumeric string that is immediately visible in the appropriate field as if it had been typed. You can add any number of different bar code strings to the item record in the database. Bar codes are not necessarily associated with particular suppliers or customers. ## Data entry through barcode scanning Barcode scanning can be used to effectively receive products at a warehouse and enter warehouse location information for them. From the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can invoke the **Add receipt line** dialog box, which has been designed for the following scenario: When you scan a product bar code, the system + finds the item record, + brings up the item information with the quantity copied from a matching purchase order, and + automatically adds a new line to the receipt or adds one unit per each scanned item if you scan items with serial numbers. To use the dialog box for bar code scanning, make sure the **Add line automatically** option is selected. Then, once the dialog box elements are filled in, the system creates a new line automatically. If you select the **Add one unit per barcode** check box in the dialog box, each time you scan a bar code, the item quantity for the receipt will be increased by one unit. If you clear the check box and you scan an item bar code, the system searches for a purchase order that matches the supplier and item ID associated with the barcode, and inserts the quantity of the item from the purchase order. If no such order is found, the system inserts one unit. If no item is found in the system after the item bar code has been scanned, you can enter the item ID of the item manually. In this case, this new barcode is automatically associated with the item. To further simplify data entry in warehouses, you can print bar codes for warehouse IDs and warehouse location IDs. You can print bar codes for such identifiers by using customised Visma Net reports. Bar codes of the warehouse and its locations also can be used when you create receipts by using the following scenarios: + If you create receipts at a desk, print bar codes on a sheet of paper, and put it close at hand. When you're creating a receipt line for an item, scan the bar code from the item, warehouse, and location bar codes from the paper. + If you generally create receipts from a cart (equipped with a scanner and a computer) after you place items in appropriate locations, perform the following actions prior to receiving goods: print location IDs as bar codes on special labels, and stick them to appropriate shelves, bins, or other storage structures available in your warehouse. Then, take items one by one from the cart, and read the item bar code and location bar code from the shelf. Appropriate receipt lines will be added automatically. ## Using bar code scanners for stocktaking With Visma Net, you can use bar code scanners to perform stocktaking counts. If product bar codes are used in your system as alternative item IDs, you can use bar code scanners for counting; each scanned bar code will increase the quantity of the item by one unit in the stocktaking document open in the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) if your system is configured for using bar codes and if the scanners are connected as an input device to your computer. Process purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders section Visma Net supports multiple types of purchase orders, and you can use various workflow options to configure the processing of orders of each type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase orders Visma Net supports multiple types of purchase orders, and you can use various workflow options to configure the processing of orders of each type. About types of purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-types-of-purchase-orders page Visma Net supports four types of purchase orders, described below: normal, drop-ship, blanket, and standard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of purchase orders Visma Net supports four types of purchase orders, described below: normal, drop-ship, blanket, and standard. ## Normal orders You can create normal purchase orders to order goods and services for retail, wholesale, production, stock replenishment, and other demands. Products purchased on normal orders are generally received to the company's warehouses. The quantities of items on such orders update the item's availability data. With the item look-up dialog box, you can check the item availability at a particular warehouse. With quantities on hand, available quantities, and quantities already on purchase orders in view, you can specify the appropriate quantity for the item. You generally create normal purchase orders by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. You select the type of the order as **Normal** and add the items to be purchased to the list; you can also add lines from an existing purchase order (or add the whole purchase order). Also, to adjust the quantity of the item on the order, you can view the demand for the item (that is, the item's quantity specified on back orders or orders with **Mark for purchase order** check box selected). By using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window, you can create multiple normal purchase orders for available back orders or sales orders with lines that list items not currently available in the company's stock and that have the **Mark for purchase order** check box selected. For more information on processing normal orders, see: [About purchase order processing options.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-purchase-order-processing-options/) ## Standard orders Orders of this type are available only if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Standard purchase orders are used as templates for normal orders. If your company regularly purchases from a supplier the same list of products in the same quantities, you can create a standard purchase order with those items listed in the required quantities by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. You can create multiple normal purchase orders that reference the standard purchase order. To do this, you add the entire standard sales order to a new normal purchase order, or add several lines from the standard sales order to a normal purchase order and edit the resulting item quantities. Unlike blanket purchase orders, standard orders have no expiration date, and their status does not change to **Closed** when all goods in the related normal orders are received. The quantities of items on standard orders do not update the items' availability data. ## Drop-ship orders Drop-ship purchase orders are used for goods that will be delivered directly from the supplier to the customer that ordered the goods from your company. These goods are not received in the inventory at your company. Orders of this type are available only if the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. To create a drop-ship purchase order, you create a new purchase order on the purchase orders window and select the **Drop ship** type. If there are sales orders for the items your company plans to purchase from the supplier, you can create a drop-ship order by using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. Once you select an item and a supplier for a new drop-ship order, sales orders (if they request the selected stock item and have the **Mark for purchase order** check box selected) are available for selection and can be added as document lines in the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. For details, see: [Create a drop-ship order flow](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow/). ## Blanket orders Blanket purchase orders are created for a longer time interval or a larger quantity of goods than your company currently needs. You may choose to order goods in larger volumes for reserved stock if considerable volume discounts are offered or the specified goods are not always available from the supplier. A blanket order has expiration date after which the order cannot be used for generating normal orders. Orders of this type are available only if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. A blanket order can be fulfilled through multiple normal orders. To do this, you create purchase orders with the **Normal** type that reference the blanket order. In this case, the open quantity on the blanket order is reduced by the quantity specified in the purchase orders with the **Normal** type, and the price is transferred to normal orders from the blanket order. When the entire quantity of goods included in the blanket order is purchased and received through normal orders, the blanket order's status changes to **Closed**. About purchase order processing options /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-purchase-order-processing-options page Organisations may have different steps and requirements for processing purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchase order processing options Organisations may have different steps and requirements for processing purchase orders. Organisations may have different steps and requirements for processing purchase orders. This topic describes the general workflow of order processing for purchase orders of the **Normal** type. ## Purchase order creation In general, the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window is the starting point for creating a purchase order, and employees can use this window to track the processing of the order. When creating a new order, you should first select a supplier and the supplier location. Then you can add stock items by clicking the **Add item** button in the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab and selecting from only the supplier's items or from the entire list of stock items. If you want to add non-stock items of any type (**Labour**, **Service**, **Non-stock**, or **Expense**), you can select them by their item IDs. If the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can add a blanket purchase order or a line of a blanket purchase order. A newly created purchase order has the **On hold** status. To reduce input errors on order entry, validation of order totals can be set up by selecting the **For normal and standard orders** check box in the **Validate total on entry** section of the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. If this check box is selected, then when you create new purchase orders in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, to take the order off hold, you must enter each order total in the **Control total** field after verifying the order details. Purchase orders based on requisitions, customer drop-ship orders, customer orders marked for purchasing, and replenishment requests can be created in bulk by using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. If approval of purchase orders is not configured in your system, a purchase order may need to be emailed, or printed once you take it off hold. After that, the order is given the **Open** status. If approval is configured, the order is given the **Pending approval** status once you take it off hold, which will change to **Pending printing**, **Pending email**, or **Open** once all the assigned approvers approve it. How an open purchase order will be processed further depends on the types and properties of the items included in the order. ## Processing of purchase orders with only stock items As you add a stock item to a purchase order, the system inserts **Goods for warehouse** as the line type for this line. The **Line type** setting indicates how the purchase order line should be processed. If a purchase order includes only stock items intended for inventory and not linked to a drop-ship order or any other sales order, its processing involves creating of a purchase receipt (or multiple receipts if the order is fulfilled by multiple shipments from the supplier). You can create a receipt for a purchase order by clicking **Actions - Enter purchase order receipt**in the toolbar of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. Alternatively, in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can create a receipt and link it to an existing purchase order or a particular line of the order by clicking **Add purchase order** or **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab. The inventory account that is used for a stock item on a receipt by default is selected according to the **Use inventory/accrual account from** setting of the posting class. On release of each receipt linked to the purchase order, the system automatically generates an inventory receipt for the items listed in the purchase receipt and calculates the quantities of the received goods for each order line. These values are displayed in the **Qty. on receipts** column on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. The order gets the **Closed** status once every line is completed according to the line completion rules (described below). Then for each receipt linked to the purchase order, you can create a invoice or multiple invoices. > ### Line completion rules > > By default, a line of a purchase order is considered completed if all the ordered quantity has been received. For each supplier, in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, you can specify the line completion rules for order lines with stock items. You can specify a threshold percent (in the **Threshold receipt (%)** field on the **Purchase settings** tab) for completing the lines of purchase orders. By default, this value is 100, which means that 100% of the specified quantity must be received for lines to be completed. This setting provides the default value for the **Complete on (%)** setting on purchase orders created for this supplier. You can change the **Complete on (%)** setting for any purchase order. Alternatively, you can also specify the min. receipt (%) and max. receipt (% **)** values, to define the range of quantities, and the **Receipt** action ( **Reject** , **Warn but accept** , or **Accept** ) to apply to the receipt if the received quantity for any line is outside this range of quantities. These settings specified for a supplier provide the default values for the same-name settings on lines of any purchase order for this supplier. > > When a receipt linked to the purchase order is released, the system will complete the line if the total quantity on receipts becomes equal to or greater than the threshold quantity (calculated as the threshold percentage of the ordered quantity). > > When you create a new receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can manually complete a line of the linked purchase order by selecting the **Complete purchase order line** check box on the line of the purchase receipt. ## Processing of purchase orders with only non-stock items that require receipt For each non-stock item, you can specify whether a purchase receipt is required by using the **Require receipt** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. This setting affects the processing of non-stock items. If a purchase order includes only non-stock items that require receipt, its processing involves creating a receipt (or multiple receipts if the ordered items are not delivered at the same time). When you add a non-stock item that requires receipt to a purchase order in the window ( **Document details** tab), the system inserts **Non-stock** as the line type. In the **Account** column, the system inserts the expense account defined by the **Use COGS/ expense account from** setting of the posting class. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the system also inserts the subaccount composed as defined by the **Combine COGS/ expense sub from** setting of the posting class appears in the **Sub.** column. If the **Require receipt** check box is selected for the non-stock item, the following accounts and subaccounts will be used: + When a purchase order is created, the item amount is recorded to the expense account (with the expense subaccount) + When a receipt linked to the purchase order is created, the line amount is moved from the expense account (with the expense subaccount) to the purchase accrual account (with the purchase accrual subaccount) + When a invoice is created for the receipt, the amount is moved back from the purchase accrual account (with the purchase accrual subaccount) to the expense account (with the expense subaccount). The expense and purchase accrual accounts to be used for receipt-related transactions are defined by the posting class of the item; the default accounts assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be used if the posting class's rules **Use COGS/expense account from** and **Use purchase accrual account from**, respectively, point to them (that is, have the **Item** option selected). The expense subaccount and purchase accrual subaccount are also defined by the settings of posting class of the item; the default subaccounts assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab will be used as the segment value sources for the resulting subaccounts according to the **Combine COGS/expense sub from** and **Combine purchase accrual sub from** rules, respectively. > ### Line completion rules > > When a receipt linked to the purchase order is released, to determine if the order line is completed, the system applies the rule that is specified for each non-stock item in the **Complete purchase order line** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, which is one of the following: > > + **By quantity** (the default option for items of the **Non-stock** type) The order line will be completed on release of a receipt if the item quantity specified on all linked receipts is equal to or exceeds the order line quantity. > > The system processes the purchase price variance amounts (if any) for the non-stock item. > + **By amount** (the default option for items of the **Labour, Service, Charge**, and **Expense** types.) If the **Require receipt** check box is selected for this item, the order line will be completed on release of a receipt if the item amount on all receipts is equal to or greater than the order line amount. ## Processing of purchase orders with only non-stock items that do not require receipt If a purchase order includes only non-stock items that do not require receipt (that is, the **Require receipt** check box is cleared for each item in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window), its processing doesn't involve creating a receipt. An invoice or multiple invoices can be created directly for the purchase order. When you add a non-stock item that does not require receipt to a purchase order in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window ( **Document details** tab), the system inserts **Service** as the line type. In the **Account** column, the system inserts the expense account defined by the **Use COGS/expense account** setting of the posting class. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the system inserts the subaccount composed as defined by the **Combine COGS /expense sub from** setting of the posting class in the **Sub.** column. > ### Line completion rules > > When a receipt linked to the purchase order is released, to determine when the order line is completed, the system applies the rule that is specified for each non-stock item in the **Complete purchase order line** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, which is one of the following: > > By quantity > : (the default option for items of the **Non-stock** type) The line will be completed on release of a invoice if the item quantity specified in the invoice is equal to or exceeds the open quantity in the order. > > By amount > : (the default option for items of the **Labour, Service, Charge**, and **Expense** types) This option indicates that the order line will be completed on release of a invoice if the amount of the invoice line is equal to or exceeds the uninvoiced amount of the order line. ## Purchase orders with mixed items If a purchase order includes stock and non-stock items of various types, its processing includes creating of a receipt or receipts, but not all the items from the order will appear on the receipts. You can use the [Purchase order details by account (PO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000/) report to view the order lines with non-stock items listed by the expense account. You will need to create invoices based on receipts linked to the order and invoices based on those lines of the original purchase order whose line items do not require receipt. Alternatively, you will need to manually add the items not requiring receipt to a invoice based on a receipt. ## Reordering lines in purchase orders You may need to reorder a line or multiple lines in the existing purchase order, or add a new line at the beginning of a list or in the middle of the list. You can reorder lines in a purchase order that is on hold. The order number of the purchase order line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for each document line. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combinations, such as the following: + A single purchase order line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example: lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of purchase order lines (for example: line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold **Shift** while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down arrow** until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of purchase order lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerate the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move purchase order lines between pages, cut the selected purchase order lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** number for each document line. You can cancel the line reordering by clicking **Cancel** in the window toolbar before you save these changes. You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. > ### Inserting lines into purchase orders > > You can insert a single line anywhere in the table. > To do this, click the line above which the > new line should be inserted and then press **Shift+Insert**, or right-click the needed > line and then click **Insert row**. > The system adds a new blank > line. > When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the > system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table. ## Tracking of open quantities To check on the fulfilment of a purchase order, you can use the **Other information** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, where the system tracks the open quantity and open balance. For a purchase order with the **Normal** or **Drop-ship** type, the open quantity is calculated as the difference between the quantity of ordered goods and the quantity of received goods on this order. For a purchase order with the **Blanket** or **Standard** type, the open quantity is calculated as the quantity of the ordered goods and the received quantities on orders of the **Normal** type that are linked to this blanket purchase order. The open balance is calculated as the difference between the total amount of the ordered items and the amount of the received items included in purchase receipts linked to the purchase orders. When the open quantity and open balance values are calculated, only released receipt documents are used for calculation. Notice that is not possible to change the item ID or UoM for any partially received line of a purchase order. If due to changes in the business process your organisation needs to switch to another UoM when purchasing a particular item and delete the rules for converting this old UoM to the base UoM, you must fulfil the following steps: 1. Define the new UoM and specify the rules for converting this UoM to the base UoM 1. Complete any purchase orders with this item's open quantities specified in the "old" purchase UoM 1. Create new orders for the remaining (unreceived) quantities specified in the "new" UoM Notice that it is not possible to delete an UoM specified for a stock item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window (or for a non-stock item in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window) if there are any released or open transactions with this UoM.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Purchase order statuses /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/purchase-order-statuses page Visma Net supports four purchase order types: normal, drop ship, blanket, and standard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order statuses Visma Net supports four purchase order types: normal, drop ship, blanket, and standard. Visma Net supports four purchase order types: normal, drop ship, blanket, and standard. For all these types, the same set of statuses is used, however different processing steps can be configured for purchase orders of different types. The purchasing process usually starts when you create a purchase order in Visma Net. You can add goods to the purchase order and specify the details for each line. The system changes the status of a purchase order during its processing. ## The table This table describes each of the possible statuses and the ways they fit into purchase order processing; the statuses are listed in the order in which they occur, if applicable.
Status Description
On hold

The status of a newly created purchase order. The system may also assign the purchase order this status if it has been rejected by the person assigned to approve it or if you have selected the Hold check box. The purchase order can be left on hold for future editing, including addition or removal of lines.

When a purchase order is on hold, its totals and quantities of listed goods are not traced or checked. To move the On holdpurchase order to the next step in its processing and change its status, clear the Hold check box in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

You can turn on the validation of totals during data entry for purchase orders of specific types by selecting the relevant check boxes in the Validate total on entry group of options in the Purchase orders preferences (PO101000) window. This validation (if set on for purchase orders of specific type) is performed when the users clear the On hold check box for the order.

Depending on the purchase order approval rules set in the system and your required processing steps, the system changes the status of the purchase order to Pending approval, Pending printing, Pending email, or Open.

Pending printing

Each purchase order must be sent to the supplier in the suppliers’ preferred way.

Printing the purchase order is an optional step in purchase order processing. Depending on the setting selected for the supplier, the status of the purchase order may be changed to Pending printing.

To require printing in the purchase order processing steps for a particular supplier, select the Print order check box on the Purchase settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window. The Printed check box on the Other information tab of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window shows whether the order has been printed.

The Pending printing status indicates that an employee must print the purchase order and then send or fax it to the supplier. To print the purchase order, select the Reports - Print purchase order on the toolbar of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window. This changes the status of the purchase order to Pending email or Open.

Pending email

Emailing the purchase order to the supplier is an optional step in purchase order processing. Depending on the setting selected for the supplier, the status of the purchase order may be changed to Pending email.

To require emailing in the purchase order processing steps for a particular supplier, select the Email order check box on the Purchase settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window. The Emailed check box on the Other information tab of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window shows whether the order has been emailed.

When a purchase order has the Pending email status, the purchase order must be sent by email to the supplier. To complete this step, select Actions - Email purchase order on the toolbar of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window. This changes the order status to Open.

Cancelled

The status of the purchase order is changed to Cancelled if the purchase order has been cancelled. This status means the purchase order cannot be edited, and no receipts can be made for it.

The cancelled purchase order keeps this status unless you change the status to On hold by selecting the Hold check box for it.

If the status is changed to On hold, the document can be edited, and the usual purchase order processing steps can be performed.

Open

The status of the purchase order is changed to Open after any necessary approvals and any other required processing steps (printing the order, emailing it, or both) are performed for the purchase order.

If no approvals or optional processing steps are required, the status of the purchase order changes from On hold to Open when the Hold check box is cleared.

The Open status means that the quantity of the items on purchase receipts for this purchase order is less than the quantity required to complete the purchase order. In Visma Net, you create the receipts for the ordered and received items by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

When a purchase order has the Open status, the system traces the quantities of items received for the order and displays the item availability information in the Inventory allocation details window in accordance with the availability calculation settings of the item.

The availability calculation settings that apply to an item are defined for its item class; these options are set on the General settings tab of the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Closed

The status of the purchase order is changed from Open to Closed after all lines of the order have been completed according to the appropriate rules or manually.

Also, you can manually complete the order by selecting Actions - Complete order in the toolbar of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

For more information about order fulfilment, see: About purchase order processing options.

Create a drop-ship order flow /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow section Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a drop-ship order flow Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. The quantities of stock items on completed drop-ship orders are not included in the quantities available at any warehouse of your company, and the data in the Inventory workspace is not updated by the data from completed drop-ship orders. With Visma Net, you can create drop-ship orders for goods that should be delivered directly to a customer location. Stock items and non-stock items (those that have the **Require receipt** check box selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window) may be drop-shipped; kits cannot be drop-shipped, because they are manufactured in the company. Drop-ship orders are created based on sales orders and on requisitions created for customers. ## Configuration In Visma Net, the functionality of drop-ship orders is available only if the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Before you start creating and processing drop-ship orders, make sure that the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled and that each warehouse has a default location for drop-ship orders selected in **Drop-ship location** field in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. Because specifying a warehouse and warehouse location is mandatory for all inventory documents, the system will automatically insert this location in all documents generated for drop-ship orders. ## Drop-ship order flow In general, the processing of drop-ship orders that originated in the Inventory workspace involves using the following actions and generating the following documents: ![Images-SO_Drop_Ship_Flow](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_Drop_Ship_Flow.png) The processing steps are described in more detail in the following sections below: ### Enter a sales order intended for drop-shipping To create a drop-ship purchase order from a sales order by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, follow the steps below: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. In the top part, select **SO** as the order type. 1. Select the customer and review the default location and currency values. Change these if needed. 1. Go to the **Document details** tab. 1. Specify the branch. 1. Specify the item ID of the requested stock item. 1. Select a warehouse. For items that are usually sold by using drop-ship orders and do not require replenishment, you can create a virtual warehouse and assign it to the replenishment class with the **Drop-shipment** option as the replenishment source. 1. Specify the quantity. Make sure the unit of measure selected by default is correct. 1. Type the price if it has not appeared by default from the supplier catalogue (if one is maintained in your system). 1. Select the **Mark for purchase order** check box. 1. Specify **Drop-shipment** as the **Purchase order source**. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared and save the order. The order status changes to **Open** and **Create purchase order** becomes available on the **Actions** menu of the toolbar. Click this action to open the appropriate window as a pop-up window so that you can create a drop-ship purchase order for this sales order. ### Generate a drop-ship purchase order Drop-ship orders can be automatically generated for multiple sales orders or can be created one-by-one for each sales order. To create a drop-ship purchase order for a particular sales order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, follow the steps below: 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Drop-ship** or a custom order type used in your organisation for drop shipping. 1. Select the supplier that will deliver the goods or services to the customer. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click **View sales order demand** on the table toolbar to view the sales orders that require drop shipping. 1. In the table of the dialog box, select the check box next to the order (or select multiple orders) and close the dialog box. 1. Edit the order if needed. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared and save the order. To save time, you can create drop-ship purchase orders in bulk by using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window as follows: 1. Go to the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. 1. In the **Order type** field of the top part of the window, select **Sales order** or a custom order type used in your organisation for drop shipping. 1. To select specific sales orders, filter the list of sales orders by a product manager, product work group, item class, warehouse, or supplier. This selects orders with a specific preferred supplier of the goods in the order. 1. Make sure each of the sales order lines listed in the table have the proper supplier specified. 1. Select the sales orders by using the check boxes to the left and click **Process** in the toolbar, or click **Process all** to generate purchase orders for all listed sales orders. The system generates the required drop-ship purchase orders. ### Create a purchase receipt for a drop-ship order To create a receipt, you need a confirmation that the customer received the goods or services from the supplier. Confirmation may be received through a call, an email, or another means. Based on business routines established in your company, you can create purchase receipts on receiving invoices from the suppliers or when you have heard from the customer, or you can create purchase receipts in advance and release them upon entering supplier invoices as invoice. You can use the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window to create a receipt manually for each drop-ship purchase order in the following way: 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. Select the order fulfilled by drop-shipment. 1. From the **Actions** menu, select **Enter purchase order receipt**. The [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window opens with the order data filled in. 1. For each item that is tracked by lot or serial numbers and for which the **Required for drop shipments** check box is selected in the [Lot/serial classes](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window, click **Allocations** on the table toolbar and assign the lot numbers to specific quantities or the serial numbers to particular units of the item. The system ignores the assignment method of the lot/serial class for items on drop-ship orders and, by default, requires assignment on receipt. 1. Type the control totals if required in your system. 1. Click **Release** in the toolbar. The status of the original sales order changes to **Completed**. Also, you can create a receipt for multiple orders of the same supplier by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window as follows: 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. Select **Receipt** as the document type. 1. Select the supplier that delivered the goods or services to the customers. 1. In the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click **Add purchase order**. The **Add purchase order** dialog box opens with the list of the supplier's open orders. 1. Use the check boxes to the left of orders to select the orders to be added to the receipt. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. For each item that is tracked by lot or serial numbers and for which the **Required for drop shipments** check box is selected in the [Lot/serial classes](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window, click **Allocations** in the table toolbar and assign the lot numbers to specific quantities or the serial numbers to particular units of the item. The system ignores the assignment method of the lot/serial class for items on drop-ship orders and, by default, requires assignment on receipt. 1. Type the control totals, if required in your system. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and save the receipt. 1. Click **Release** in the toolbar. The status of the original sales order changes to **Completed**. ### Create an invoice for the drop-ship order To create an invoice for the drop-ship order in the [Process shipments](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window, proceed as follows: 1. Go to the [Process shipments](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. In the top part of the window, select **Prepare drop-ship invoice** in the **Action** field. 1. Select the customer to view the customer's receipts. 1. In the table, select the check boxes next to the receipts you want to include in an invoice. 1. Click **Process**. One invoice or multiple invoices will be generated based on whether the **Invoice separately** option is selected for the order type (the invoices will be grouped by order type) and whether the similar ( **Invoice separately** ) option is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The generated invoices are linked to the original sales orders. 1. Release invoices one-by-one by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) or the [Customer invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window, or release them in bulk using the [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

About processing invoices with stock and non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-processing-invoices-with-stock-and-non-stock-items section If the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, each invoice in Visma Net (whether it was created manually or imported) may include a summary line for all the purchases or it may have detail lines for non-stock items purchased from the supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing invoices with stock and non-stock items If the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, each invoice in Visma Net (whether it was created manually or imported) may include a summary line for all the purchases or it may have detail lines for non-stock items purchased from the supplier. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, invoices can include stock items along with non-stock items, and invoices either can be generated based on purchase receipts and purchase orders or can be created independently and linked to these purchasing documents later. ## Workflow with invoices based on purchase receipts In Visma Net, you can set up the following order of processing purchase orders in which the invoices are generated after the goods and services have been received from the suppliers. ### Generating invoices bases on purchase receipts To set up the workflow of successive processing of purchase orders, receipts, and invoices, you can use the **Create invoice on receipt release** check box in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, which provides the default value for the **Create invoice** check box in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. If such a check box is selected for a purchase receipt, a invoice will be generated automatically once the purchase receipt is released. If the **Create invoice** check box is not selected for a purchase receipt, you can create a invoice manually for each receipt by clicking **Actions - Enter an invoice** in the toolbar of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. Alternatively, you can create invoices in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window by adding purchase receipts (for stock items and non-stock items requiring receipt) and purchase orders (for non-stock items that do not require purchase receipts) or only specific lines from purchase receipts. If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system, then when you create a invoice based on purchase receipt lines, purchase receipts, and purchase orders, supplier discounts that were originally applied to the purchase orders or purchase receipts are recalculated proportionally to the partial amounts in the invoice. ## Workflow with purchase receipts and invoices created independently In your organisation, if invoices are received from suppliers and entered the system before the goods arrive or invoices are imported from a third-party system, you must link them to existing purchase receipts or to purchase orders depending on the type of items before you can release them. In this case, you can establish a workflow in which at certain stage you link the lines in existing invoices to lines in existing purchase receipts or purchase orders. ### Linking invoices to receipts To be able to link invoice lines to the lines of corresponding purchase orders and purchase receipts, make sure that for the invoices the **VAT settings** option is selected in the **VAT calculation mode** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system, supplier discounts applied to the invoice are not recalculated when you link the invoice lines to the lines of purchase receipts or purchase orders. The major stages of this workflow of processing purchase orders, receipts, and invoices with stock items are described in the sections below. ## Create purchase orders Your organisation creates purchase orders of the **Normal** type as required by its purchasing policies by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. On a purchase order, you can list the stock and non-stock items to be purchased from the particular supplier. ## Create invoices You can import the invoices from a third-party application or you can enter invoices received from the suppliers by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Stock and non-stock items may be listed in a invoice. When you add a stock item to a invoice, the system displays a message that warns you that the line should be linked to a purchase receipt before the invoice can be released. You create or import invoices with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status. You can not release a created invoice until you link each line with a stock item to an appropriate line in a purchase receipt. ## Create purchase receipts You can create purchase receipts for a purchase order by clicking the **Enter purchase receipt**action in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. Alternatively, purchase receipts that are not based on purchase orders can be created in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. You can add to a purchase receipt stock items, non-stock items that require receipt, and non-stock items that do not require receipt. When you create a purchase receipt, make sure the **Create invoice**check box is cleared; otherwise, you will not be able to link this receipt to an existing invoice. ## Release purchase receipts You can release purchase receipts one by one by clicking **Release** in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. Alternatively, you can release multiple receipts at the same time by using the [Release purchase receipts (PO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-purchase-receipts-po501000/) window. When purchase receipts that include stock items are released, inventory receipts are generated. ## Link invoice lines to the lines of purchase receipts and orders By using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, you must link each line of a invoice with a stock item to a line of a released purchase receipt. If the invoice includes non-stock items, you also can link the lines with non-stock items to the lines of released purchase receipts or open purchase orders, depending on the type of non-stock items. You can link a invoice line to only one line of a purchase receipt. If you have received only a partial quantity of an item, you can link the purchase receipt with the remaining quantity to another invoice's line. To link all lines of a invoice to purchasing documents, perform the following steps: 1. For each line of the invoice, do the following: 1. Select a invoice line on the **Document details** tab. 1. Click **Link line** in the table toolbar. The **Link line** dialog box opens. 1. For a stock item or for a non-stock item that requires receipt, review the list of purchase receipt lines with the same item and the same or a smaller quantity measured in the same UoM. For matching lines, the system searches among the receipts of the same supplier, in the same currency, with the same supplier location. Select the matching receipt line. 1. For a non-stock item that does not require receipt, review the lines of purchase orders with the item and the same or a smaller quantity measured in the same UoM. For matching lines, the system searches among the orders of the same supplier, in the same currency, with the same supplier location. Select the matching line. If no matching line is found, select the **Purchase receipt** selection mode and review any listed purchase receipt lines with the item. Select the matching purchase receipt line. 1. Click **Save** in the dialog box to save the link and close the dialog box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Information about the linked documents appears for each linked line of the invoice on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window (in the **Purchase order type**, **Purchase order number**, **Purchase order receipt no.**, and **Purchase order receipt line** columns). While the invoice is unreleased, you can cancel the established links and link the invoice lines to other documents if needed.

Related pages

Concepts

Link purchase orders to projects /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/link-purchase-orders-to-projects page To receive purchases in a warehouse that is linked to projects, you must first create one or more warehouse locations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Link purchase orders to projects To receive purchases in a warehouse that is linked to projects, you must first create one or more warehouse locations. To receive purchases in a warehouse that is linked to projects, you must first create one or more warehouse locations. Every project and task must have its own warehouse location. 1. Go to the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. 1. In the **Warehouse ID** field, select the warehouse where you want to receive the items you are going to use for the project. 1. In the **Location table**, click the plus sign to add a line and add the location ID, a description, the project you want to link to and the relevant project task. 1. Click **Save**. 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. Select the supplier of the items you want to link to a project and fill out the necessary information. 1. Click **Save**. 1. Deselect the **Hold** check box and click **Release**. 1. On the purchase receipt line on the purchase receipt, the warehouse location now displays the project. 1. You can now issue the item to the project. 1. Go to the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. 1. On the **Transaction details** tab, click the plus sign to add a new line. 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the item, the project, and the project task. 1. Click **Release**. 1. The system now updates the project balance. 1. Go to the [Purchase receipt (PO646000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000/) window and select the relevant purchase receipt. 1. Click the **Actions** button and select **Create purchase invoice**. 1. Enter a **Supplier ref.** and click **Save**. 1. Click **Release**. Purchase order workflow with change orders /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/purchase-order-workflow-with-change-orders page You can create change orders for the Normal type of purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order workflow with change orders You can create change orders for the Normal type of purchase orders. The change order workflow affects the standard purchase order life cycle as follows: + The change order workflow is automatically enabled for a normal purchase order if at least one purchase order line refers to a project with the change order workflow enabled. + After a purchase order with the change order workflow has been assigned the **Open** status and at least one related change order has been created, the purchase order cannot be removed or put on hold. + After an existing purchase order with the **Open** status has been changed by means of a change order and printing or emailing is required for the purchase order, the system assigns to the purchase order the **Pending printing** or **Pending email** status, respectively. + A purchase order with the **Pending printing** or **Pending email** status status cannot be removed from the system if there is a change order that refers to this purchase order. + A purchase order with the **Open** status and with the change order workflow enabled can be modified by means of change orders only. + A purchase order with the **Open** status or an open line of this purchase order can be canceled or completed. + A purchase order that originates from a change order cannot be edited or removed and can be only printed, emailed, cancelled, completed, or altered by yet another change order. Process purchase receipts and returns /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase receipts and returns Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Process purchase receipts and returns - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview page When purchase receipts are created and released, they indicate that the purchased goods have been received at the company's warehouses and allocated. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase receipts and returns - overview When purchase receipts are created and released, they indicate that the purchased goods have been received at the company's warehouses and allocated. When purchase receipts are created and released, they indicate that the purchased goods have been received at the company's warehouses and allocated. In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balances with the suppliers. In some cases, however, if the received items are in unsatisfactory condition or were shipped by mistake, they must be returned to the supplier for replacement or reimbursement. Also, services that were not rendered or were provided partially should be reimbursed. In these situations, purchase returns are created in Visma Net to account for the movement of items back to the supplier. About purchase receipt processing options /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-purchase-receipt-processing-options page A purchase receipt is used to track the one-time receipt of goods purchased from a single supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchase receipt processing options A purchase receipt is used to track the one-time receipt of goods purchased from a single supplier. A purchase receipt is used to track the one-time receipt of goods purchased from a single supplier. You use a purchase receipt to verify the fulfilment of the purchase order or orders in which the received goods were ordered. As such, a purchase receipt must be linked to the applicable purchase orders. This topic describes the general workflow of processing purchase receipts in Visma Net. For more information on tracking purchase order fulfilment, see: [About purchase order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-purchase-order-processing-options/). ## Creating a purchase receipt When goods are received, you create a new document with the **Receipt** type by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, which is also used for processing purchase receipts on per document basis. On the **Document details** tab, you add lines to specify the quantity and additional details of all received goods. If lot or serial numbers are traced for the received items, they may be assigned at the time of receipt if configured so. To view the assigned lot and serial numbers of the received items, click **Allocations** on the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab. If purchase orders are involved in your purchasing workflow, you can create purchase receipts which are based on purchase orders or linked to purchase orders or particular lines in the orders. If the goods or services received were previously ordered with a purchase order, you can create a receipt for this particular purchase order, by selecting **Actions** and **Create purchase receipt** in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. Only lines with stock items and non-stock items for which the **Require receipt** check box is selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be automatically added to the receipt. Alternatively, when you receive purchases from a single supplier and create a new purchase receipt by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can add one or multiple purchase orders to this receipt; also you can add particular lines from purchase orders. To add a purchase order line into the purchase receipt, click**Add purchase order line** in the table toolbar on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. To copy all lines of a purchase order into the purchase receipt, click **Add purchase order** in the table toolbar. Receipts can be linked to only normal or drop-ship orders; see [About types of purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-types-of-purchase-orders/) for details about these and other purchase order types. Only lines with stock items and non-stock items for which the **Require receipt**check box is selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be automatically added to the receipt. The status a new receipt will be saved with depends on the **Hold receipts on entry** check box in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/). If this check box is selected, new receipts are saved with the **On hold** status by default. If you clear this check box, new purchase receipts are saved with the **Balanced** status by default. To reduce input errors on receipt creation, you can set up validation of receipt totals by selecting the **For receipts** check box in the **Validate total on entry** section in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. If this check box is selected, you must enter the receipt total manually in the **Control amt.** field after verifying the details of the receipt. ## Reordering lines in purchase receipts You may need to reorder a purchase receipt's lines, for example, if you need the lines of the printed document to be in a specific order. Also, you may need to reorder the lines in the existing purchase receipt, or add a new line at the beginning of a list or in the middle of it. You can reorder the lines of a purchase receipt until it has been released. The order number of each purchase receipt line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for each document line. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combination, such as the following: + A single purchase receipt line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example, lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of purchase receipt lines (for example, line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold **Shift** while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down arrow** until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of purchase receipt lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move purchase receipt lines between pages, cut the selected purchase receipt lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** number for each document line. These numbers are used for numbering lines in the printable reports, such as the printable purchase receipt shown in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. You can cancel the line reordering by clicking **Cancel**in the window toolbar before you save these changes. You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. ## Inserting lines into purchase receipts You can insert a single line anywhere in the document. To do this, click the line above which the new line should be inserted and then press **Shift+Insert**, or right-click the needed line and then click **Insert row**. The system adds a new blank line. When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table. ## Calculating supplier discounts on receipts If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system, you can configure supplier discounts to be applied to receipts. If purchase receipts are created as original purchasing documents, supplier discounts can be applied automatically or manually depending on how you configure the discounts. If purchase receipts are created based on purchase orders or lines of purchase orders, the discounts that were originally applied to the purchase orders are recalculated based on the original documents (orders). If a **line-level** discount was applied to a purchase order line, the system automatically recalculates the discount amount for an appropriate receipt line proportionally to the amount or quantity of the receipt line and selects the **Manual discount** check box for the receipt line to prevent automatic re-applying of the discounts to the receipt as to an original document. The amounts of the **group** and **document level** discounts for the receipt lines linked to purchase order are recalculated proportionally to the amount of the receipt lines with respect to the discountable amount of the purchase order. ## Releasing receipts You can release a purchase receipt with the **Balanced** status by clicking **Release**in the window toolbar of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On release of a purchase receipt, an inventory receipt is generated automatically. To release multiple purchase receipts simultaneously, use the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On release of a receipt that includes non-stock items requiring receipt, the amounts of appropriate lines are recorded to the purchase accrual accounts (with the purchase accrual subaccount). The purchase accrual account to be used for receipt of such a non-stock item is defined by the posting class of the non-stock item; the default account assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be used if the posting class's **Use purchase accrual account from** rule points to it (that is, to have the **Item** option selected). The purchase accrual subaccount is also defined by the settings of posting class of the item; the default subaccount assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab will be used as one of the segment value sources for the resulting subaccount according to the **Combine purchase accrual sub from** rule. If the **Release inventory documents automatically** option on the **General settings** tab of the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window is selected, the inventory receipt is released automatically once it is generated. By using the following options on the **General settings** tab of the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, you can adjust the workflow for processing the purchase receipts and the related documents as needed in your organisation: + The **Create invoice on receipt release** check box provides the default value for the **Create invoice** check box in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. You can override this setting if needed for the particular receipt. For the convenience of the users, select this check box if invoices should be generated automatically for most receipts. Clear this check box if the users should enter invoices manually for most receipts or if the users enter or import the invoices and later link them to receipts. + If the **Release supplier ledger documents automatically** option is selected, the purchase invoices based on the purchase receipts are released automatically once they are generated. For each purchase order or purchase order line added to the purchase receipt, the system calculates the quantities of the received goods, and displays this value for each line in the **Qty. on receipts** column on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. For blanket purchase orders, these quantities of items (the **Qty. on receipts** column) are updated from the lines of normal purchase orders linked to these blanket orders. The system changes the purchase order's status to **Closed** after the ordered quantity of the purchased goods has been received.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About purchase price variance /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-purchase-price-variance page The purchase price variance is the difference between the total price of an item on a purchase receipt and the total price of the item on a related purchase invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchase price variance The purchase price variance is the difference between the total price of an item on a purchase receipt and the total price of the item on a related purchase invoice. ## Purchase price variance calculation This difference may have various causes, such as changes in the delivery costs. When you create a purchase receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you will normally enter estimates for the prices of the items in the receipt, since you do not know their actual prices. When you create the related purchase invoice in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, you do know the actual prices and any additional costs, and can enter these on the invoice. When you release the purchase invoice, the system calculates the purchase price variance for each line item as the difference between the total cost of the item on the purchase receipt and the total cost of the item on the invoice. The item cost on the purchase receipt depends on the cost valuation method assigned to the item. The ways in which the calculated purchase price valuation can be allocated depends on the selected item cost valuation method and allocation mode for the stock item. ## Purchase price variance valuation methods and allocation modes [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) Valuation methods for stock items are set using the **Valuation method** field in the **Stock items** window. If a stock item has been assigned the valuation method **Standard**, the purchase price variance amounts are allocated to the standard cost variance account defined by the posting class of the item. [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) If a stock item has been assigned the valuation method **Average**, **FIFO**, or **Specific**, you can select one of the following modes of purchase price variance allocation in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window: Inventory account : Select this allocation mode to register the variance to the inventory accounts and thereby update the item costs. If you select this mode, you must also select a reason code that provides the expense accounts and subaccounts used for the purchase price variance allocation. For examples on how to use the Inventory account allocation mode, see [Purchase price variance allocation - example 1](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-1/) and [Purchase price variance allocation - example 2](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-2/). Purchase price variance account : Select this allocation mode to register the variance to the purchase price variance accounts defined by the posting class of the item. About return processing options /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-return-processing-options page In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balance with the supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About return processing options In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balance with the supplier. In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balance with the supplier. In some cases, however, items that have been delivered in an unsatisfactory condition or shipped by mistake should be returned to the supplier for replacement or reimbursement. Also, services that were not rendered or were provided partially should be reimbursed. This topic describes the general workflow of processing purchase returns in Visma Net. ## Recording returns in the Purchases workspace When goods must be returned to the supplier, you can create receipts of the **Return** type in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. When you create a return, you can add a purchase order, add an order line, or specify the items with their quantities manually. If you have added a purchase order or a line of the purchase order and specified the quantity to be returned to the supplier, you may need to select the **Open purchase order line**check box for the return line to keep the linked order line open until replacement for the returned items is received. If you select the **Open purchase order line** check box for a return line, the quantity on receipts in the original order line (which is linked to the return line) will be decreased by the quantity in the appropriate return line. You can add stock and non-stock items to returns. For stock items, you must specify the warehouse from which the items will be issued to be sent back to the supplier. For items with lot or serial numbers, you can click **Allocations** in the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab to specify these numbers for the returned units. Also, notes and files can be attached to the document so you can give your supplier detailed information about why the items are being returned. For each line in the return receipt, a reason code must be specified. When the item is returned, on release of the purchase return, the item's extended cost is recorded to the expense account defined by the reason code specified for each return line. The further processing of returns in Visma Net involves integration with the Inventory and Supplier ledger workspaces. ## Processing returns in the Inventory workspace Once the return document (a receipt of the **Return** type) is released, the system automatically generates an inventory issue that includes only stock items; non-stock items of the **Non-stock** type that were listed on the return, are not included in this inventory issue. The inventory issues that are generated for returns are released immediately if the **Release inventory documents automatically** option is selected in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window; otherwise, you should release the issues manually in the Inventory workspace. Once inventory issues are released, the availability data for the items is updated: The quantities of returned items are deducted from the item quantities available at the specified warehouse locations. On release of such an inventory issue, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Dr, ext. cost + Inventory account, inventory subaccount: Cr, ext. cost The extended cost for an issue of the **Return** type is calculated as for an regular issue: Unit cost used for the item on the inventory issue for return depends on the valuation method (for instance, for items with **Average** as the valuation method, it is the current unit cost calculated at the moment of release of the issue. The purchase expense account is associated with the reason code specified for return, while the inventory account is determined by the posting class of the item. Once an item is issued from its warehouse location according to the inventory issue document, the item can be shipped or transferred to the supplier. ## Processing returns in the Supplier ledger workspace To make the system automatically generate an supplier ledger purchase credit note when a return (receipt of the **Return** type) is released, select the **Create invoice**check box in the top part of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window for this return. Alternatively, you will need to click **Actions - Enter supplier ledger invoice** for the return in the window toolbar to generate a purchase credit note. The supplier ledger purchase credit notes are released immediately if the **Release supplier ledger documents automatically** option is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, you should release these adjustments manually in the Supplier ledger workspace. On release of the purchase credit note, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Supplier ledger account, supplier ledger subaccount: Dr, ext. cost + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Cr, ext. cost The purchase expense account is associated with the reason code specified for return, while the supplier ledger account is associated with the supplier location. Further processing of returns depends on the agreement between your company and the supplier. The stages of processing the item at the supplier company are not reflected by the return's statuses. You can complete the processing of the return in the Supplier ledger workspace in one of the following ways: + If the supplier usually refunds your company for returned items, you should enter the refund and apply it to the appropriate purchase credit note. + If the supplier usually sends your company replacements for all returned items, create a purchase return and link it to the original order.If the **Require approval of invoices prior to payment** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, make sure that the purchase credit notes are not approved for payment until the associated returns are received and approved by the supplier; otherwise, the adjustments might be applied to unrelated invoices. ## Viewing returns You can view information about item movements by using the [Inventory transaction summary](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000/) window. The items that were received and issued in the same period with no sales or transfer quantities specified are returns with cost information specified. To get more specific information, use the [Inventory transaction history](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000/) window. In this window, you can select a particular stock item and view the reference numbers of purchase return documents. ## Tracking costs on returns: an example Suppose that your company purchased five chairs (item ID **CHR00124**) with a unit price at €100. The item with this item ID is assigned the **Average** valuation method. On release of the inventory receipt, the item's extended cost was recorded to the purchase accrual account defined by the posting class of the item. The following general ledger entries are generated: + Inventory account, inventory subaccount: Dr, 500 + Purchase accrual account, purchase accrual subaccount: Cr, 500 The inventory account and purchase accrual account for each item are determined by the posting class of this item; the rule for the selection of the posting class is specified in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window in the **Use inventory/accrual account from** and **Use purchase accrual account from** fields, respectively. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the inventory subaccount used for the batch transaction is defined by the rule specified in the **Combine inventory/accrual sub. from** field on the same window, and the purchase accrual subaccount is defined by the rule in the **Combine purchase accrual sub. from** field. On release of the supplier ledger invoice, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Purchase accrual account, purchase accrual subaccount: Dr, 500 + Supplier ledger account, supplier ledger subaccount: Cr, 500 The supplier ledger account and supplier ledger subaccount are associated with the location of the supplier in the [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) window. Later, an employee discovered that the chairs are of the wrong colour. A purchase receipt of the **Return** type was created, and the original purchase order was added to this receipt. On release of this purchase receipt, the system generates an inventory issue. On release of the inventory issue, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Dr, 512.50 + Inventory account, inventory subaccount: Cr, 512.50 The purchase expense account is determined by the reason code specified for the return line. The default reason code for returns can be specified in the **Purchase order return reason code** in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. The extended cost on the inventory issue differs from the extended cost on the original receipt, because for inventory issues, the system uses the current average cost of the item, which is 102.50. On release of the purchase credit note, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Supplier ledger account, supplier ledger subaccount: Dr, 500 + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Cr, 500 Thus, the purchase expense account (purchase expense subaccount) accrues any differences in costs as expenses, in this case, the amount of 12.50.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Create a purchase receipt /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/create-a-purchase-receipt section By using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you can create a purchase receipt for a particular purchase order or any items received at a specific warehouse for multiple purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase receipt By using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you can create a purchase receipt for a particular purchase order or any items received at a specific warehouse for multiple purchase orders. For more information: [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/). 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) (PO302000). 1. Select **Receipt** as the receipt type. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. 1. Check the location of the supplier, and change it if needed. 1. Check the date of the receipt, and change it if needed. 1. Select the **Create invoice** check box if you want the system to create an invoice for the received items automatically. If you want to create an invoice later, do not select the check box. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, specify the reference number of the supplier's original document if references to supplier documents are required in your system. 1. Provide a brief description of this receipt. 1. If you need to add the received items by entering specific item IDs or by scanning bar codes, click **Add line**. The **Add receipt line** dialog box opens. For each item that you want to add, do the following: 1. Enter the item's item ID in the **Item ID** field. 1. If there is only one purchase order with this item, notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. Proceed to step 9e. 1. If there are multiple orders with this item, when the **Add purchase order line** dialog box opens (displaying the lines with this item from multiple orders), select the check box next to the line that you want to add to the receipt. Notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. 1. At the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box, click **Add and close**. 1. Review the information about the order line in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, and click **Add line**. 1. If you added lines, in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, click **Close**. 1. Review any added lines, and specify the correct quantities of the received items in the **Receipt qty.** column. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, and click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. 1. If you need to add lines for items from specific purchase orders, click **Add purchase order**. The **Add purchase order** dialog box opens. 1. Select the check boxes (in the column with a check box as a column heading) next to orders that you want to add to the receipt. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order** dialog box. 1. Review the order lines, delete the unneeded lines, and specify the quantities of the received items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you need to add specific lines from purchase orders, click **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar. For each line that you want to add, perform the following actions: 1. In the **Order no.** column, select the order by its reference number. 1. Review its lines and select the line with the received item. 1. Click **Add** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box. 1. If you have added lines from purchase orders in the previous step, review each added line, and in the **Receipt qty.** column, specify the correct quantities of the received items. 1. If any of the added items require lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** in the table toolbar. In the **Allocations** dialog box, select the lot or serial numbers of the received items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Review each of the items for which lot or serial numbers must be specified when the items are received (which is indicated by a yellow exclamation mark in the **Receipt qty.** column). To specify particular locations or lot or serial numbers for each item, execute the following steps: 1. Select a line with an item requiring allocation, and click **Allocations** on the table toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. If you need to distribute the item quantity among multiple locations, in the **Location** column, select one of the locations with a non-zero quantity of the item and specify the quantity to be received to this location in the **Quantity** column. Add lines with other locations as needed until the entire quantity is distributed. 1. If you need to assign lot or serial numbers to the units of the item, select the location where the units will be stocked. Notice the value in the **Start lot/serial no.** field, and specify the quantity of units for which the lot or serial numbers will be generated. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. If the **Control quantity** field is available in the top part of the window, type the total quantity of the receipt. 1. If the **Control amount** field is available in the to part of the window, type the total amount of the receipt. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. 1. Click **Release**. To view the details of the original order linked to any selected line in this receipt, click the **View purchase order** button on the table toolbar. To view the inventory receipt generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries - View inventory document**. To view the invoice generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries** and select **View supplier document**. Parent topic: [Process purchase receipts and returns - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview/) Create a purchase return /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/create-a-purchase-return section To create a purchase return, by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you create a purchase receipt of the Return type for the items to be returned to the supplier for an replacement or an refund. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase return To create a purchase return, by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you create a purchase receipt of the Return type for the items to be returned to the supplier for an replacement or an refund. For more information: [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/). 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Select **Return** as the receipt type. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. 1. Check the location of the supplier, and change it if needed. 1. Check the date of the return and change it if needed. 1. Select the **Create invoice** check box if you want the system to create a purchase credit note for the returned items automatically. If you want the returned items to be replaced, do not select the check box. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, specify the reference number of the supplier's original document such as return authorisation. 1. Provide a brief description of this return. 1. If you need to add the items (to be returned) by entering specific item IDs or by scanning bar codes, click **Add line** on the table toolbar. The **Add receipt line** dialog box opens. For each item that you want to add, do the following: 1. Enter the item ID in the **Item ID** field. 1. If there is only one order with this item, notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. Proceed to Step 9e. 1. If there are multiple orders, when the **Add purchase order line** dialog box opens (displaying the lines with this item from multiple orders), select the check box next to the line that you want to add to the return. Notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. 1. At the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box, click **Add and close**. 1. Review the information about the order line in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, and click **Add line**. 1. If you added lines, in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, click **Close**. 1. Review any added lines, and specify the correct quantities of the returned items in the **Receipt qty.** column. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) in the window toolbar. 1. If you need to add items from specific purchase orders, click **Add purchase order**. The **Add purchase order** dialog box opens. 1. Select the check boxes (in the column with a check box as a column heading) next to orders that you want to add to the purchase return. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order** dialog box. 1. Review the order lines, delete the unnecessary lines, and specify the quantities of the items to be returned. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you need to add specific lines from purchase orders, click **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar. For each line that you want to add, perform the following actions: 1. In the **Order no.** column, select the order by its reference number. 1. Review its lines and select the line with the item to be returned. 1. Click **Add** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box. 1. If you have added lines from purchase orders in the previous step, review each added line and in the **Receipt qty.** column specify the correct quantities of the returned items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Review each of the items requiring allocation (which is indicated by a yellow exclamation mark in the **Receipt qty.** column). To specify particular locations or lot or serial numbers for each item, execute the following steps: 1. Select a line with an item requiring allocation, and click **Allocations** on the table toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. If the specified location has lower quantity than the quantity to be returned, in the **Location** column, select one of the locations with a non-zero quantity of the item and specify the quantity to be returned from this location in the **Quantity** column. Add lines with other locations as needed. 1. If you need to return units of the item with particular lot or serial numbers, select the location where they are stocked. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select the lot or serial number for the returned unit. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 for a serialised item or to the lot quantity for a lot. A new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another lot or serial number. Continue selecting numbers until the remaining quantity of the return line is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. Review the receipt lines, and if needed, do the following for each line: 1. Select a specific reason code instead of the default reason code for returns. 1. Select the **Open purchase order** check box to open the purchase order line that is linked to the receipt line and to update (that is, decrease) the quantity on receipts for the order line. 1. If the **Control quantity** field is available in the top part of the window, type the total quantity on the return. 1. If the **Control amount** field is available in the top part of the window, type the total amount of the return. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. 1. To view the details of the original order linked to any selected line in this return, click the **View purchase order** button in the table toolbar. 1. To view the inventory issue generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries - View inventory document**. To view the purchase credit note generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries - View supplier document**. Parent topic: [Process purchase receipts and returns - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview/) Add items in purchase receipts using barcode scanner /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/add-items-in-purchase-receipts-using-barcode-scanner section You can use barcode scanning to effectively receive products at a warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add items in purchase receipts using barcode scanner You can use barcode scanning to effectively receive products at a warehouse. From the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can invoke the **Add line** dialogue, where you scan a product barcode, the system finds the item record, brings up the item information, and adds a new line to the receipt. ## How to use barcodes to add purchase receipt lines 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new receipt and select a supplier. 1. Click **Add line**. 1. Add the bar code to the **Barcode** field with a scanner or enter it manually. To use the dialogue for barcode scanning, make sure the **Add line automatically** option is selected. Then, once the fields in the dialogue are filled in, the system creates a new line automatically. If you select the **Add one unit per barcode** check box in the dialogue, each time you scan a barcode, the item quantity for the receipt will be increased by one unit. If you clear the check box when an item barcode is scanned, the system searches the purchase order that matches the supplier and item ID associated with the barcode. Then the system inserts the quantity of the item from the purchase order. If no such order is found, the system inserts one unit. Add item to purchase receipt using supplier part ID /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/add-item-to-purchase-receipt-using-supplier-part-id page When receiving the items for a purchase order I want to search and add the items to the receipt by using the supplier part ID. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add item to purchase receipt using supplier part ID When receiving the items for a purchase order I want to search and add the items to the receipt by using the supplier part ID. 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. 1. Click **Add line** and the **Add receipt line** window opens. 1. Write the supplier part ID in the **Item ID** field and press **Enter** on the keyboard. If there is only one purchase order for the supplier containing the item, you will see the reference to the purchase order in the **Order no.** field. When you add the line to the purchase receipt, it is connected to the purchase order, so that the correct purchase order item is received. If there are several purchase orders for the supplier containing the item, the system will open the **Add purchase order line** window after you have entered the supplier part ID. Here you can select which purchase order item you receive and add it to the purchase receipt. > [!NOTE] > that you can also add items with the help of barcodes in the **Add receipt line** window. Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-a-cash-on-delivery-cod-transaction page The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as cash on delivery (COD) or, because other methods of payment besides cash might be involved, collect on delivery (COD). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as cash on delivery (COD) or, because other methods of payment besides cash might be involved, collect on delivery (COD). The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as **cash on delivery (COD)** or, because other methods of payment besides cash might be involved, **collect on delivery (COD)**. Visma Net provides you with functionality that you can use to account for payments made on delivery. This topic describes the basic workflow when you process a purchase order to be paid on delivery. ## Basic process To process a purchase order that will be paid on delivery, you perform the following general steps: 1. **Create a purchase order** In the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, create a purchase order. Select the supplier, and provide all the required details about the goods and services to be purchased. Save the order. Depending on your company's policies, additional steps might follow the creation of the purchase order, for instance, for approval of the order. 1. Prepare a supplier ledger payment In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, open the prepayment request, and click **Pay invoice/apply adjustment** on the **Actions** menu. This action opens the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window with information filled in for a new supplier ledger payment, which is ready to be saved. Save and release the payment. 1. Create a receipt for the purchase order. Once the goods are received and payment is made, you can create a receipt in either of the following ways: + In the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, open the original purchase order, on the **Actions** menu, select **Create receipt**. This opens the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window with a ready-to-save receipt. + In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, specify the supplier, and on the table toolbar of the **Details** tab, click **Add purchase order**. Select the original purchase order to add to the receipt. Save the receipt. 1. **Release the receipt** On release of the receipt, the system generates an supplier ledger invoice, applies prepayment to the purchase order, and changes the status of the purchase order to **Closed**. Parent topic: [Process purchase receipts and returns - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview/) Purchase price variance allocation - example 1 /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-1 page This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase price variance allocation - example 1 This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. The examples assume that: + You select **Inventory account** as the allocation mode for purchase price variance (PPV) amounts. + You assign the **Average cost** valuation method to the purchased items. + All quantities of items in stock remain unchanged between the dates of receipt and invoice. ## Step 1 - Create a purchase receipt In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you create a purchase receipt for the following items. ### Purchase receipt |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|250|2500| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|15|380|5700| |**Total**:|10960||| When you release the purchase receipt, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory receipt |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|2500|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|2760|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|5700|0| |**Purchase accrual:**|0|10960| ## Step 2 - Create an invoice In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, select Actions - Create purchase invoice. When you receive and enter the purchase invoice for the initial quantities of the items, you enter the following information. ### Purchase invoice |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|450|4500| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|15|180|2700| |**Total**:|9960||| When you release the purchase invoice, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the purchase invoice |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Purchase accrual**|9960|0| |**Supplier ledger**|0|9960| When you release this invoice, the system also creates an inventory adjustment with the following lines. ### Inventory adjustment |Item|Extended cost| |---|---| |**Item 1**|2000| |**Item 3**|-3000| ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory adjustment |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|2000|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|0|3000| |**Purchase accrual**:|1000|0| Purchase price variance allocation - example 2 /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-2 page This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase price variance allocation - example 2 This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. The examples assume that: + You select **Inventory account** as the allocation mode for purchase price variance (PPV) amounts. + You assign the **Average cost** valuation method to the purchased items. + Some quantities of the purchased items were issued (sold) between the date of the receipt and the date of the invoice. ## Step 1 - Create a purchase receipt In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you create a purchase receipt for the following items. ### Purchase receipt |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|250|2500| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|15|380|5700| |**Total**:|10960||| When you release the purchase receipt, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory receipt |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|2500|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|2760|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|5700|0| |**Purchase accrual**:|0|10960| ## Step 2 - Create an inventory issue During the next few days, you sell some quantities of the items. The system generates an inventory issue with the following lines. ### Inventory issue |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|7|250|1750| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|5|380|1900| |**Total**:|6410||| As a result of this inventory issue, the system generates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the issue (sale) |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|1750|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|2760|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|1900|0| |**Expense (COGS)**|0|6410| ## Step 3 - Create an invoice In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, select Actions - Create purchase invoice. When you receive and enter the purchase invoice for the initial quantities of the items, you enter the following information. ### Purchase invoice |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|450|4500| |**Item 2**|23|200|4600| |**Item 3**|15|180|2700| |**Total**:|11800||| When you release the purchase invoice, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the purchase invoice |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Purchase accrual**|11800|0| |**Supplier ledger**|0|11800| When you release this invoice, the system also creates an inventory adjustment with the following lines. ### Inventory adjustment |Item|Extended cost| |---|---| |**Item 1**|600| |**Item 3**|-2000| |**Item 1 (PPV expense)**|1400| |**Item 2 (PPV expense)**|1840| |**Item 3 (PPV expense)**|-1000| When you release this adjustment, the system generates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory adjustment |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|600|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|0|2000| |**PPV expense (Item 1)**|1400|0| |**PPV expense (Item 2)**|1840|0| |**PPV expense (Item 3)**|0|1000| |**Purchase accrual**|0|2000| |**Purchase accrual**|0|1840| |**Purchase accrual**|3000|0| Process landed costs /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs section In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process landed costs In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. Landed costs may depend on specific items, or on items' weight or volume. Some amounts of landed costs may be known in advance, while others become known only when the items are received at the destination warehouse. Process landed costs - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/process-landed-costs-overview page In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process landed costs - overview In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. Landed costs may depend on specific items, or on items' weight or volume. Some amounts of landed costs may be known in advance, while others become known only when the items are received at the destination warehouse. About landed cost codes /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-codes page The total cost of goods purchased generally includes the purchase price and additional charges, such as freight or other shipping costs and insurance; for an international shipment, it may also include customs duties and other taxes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About landed cost codes The total cost of goods purchased generally includes the purchase price and additional charges, such as freight or other shipping costs and insurance; for an international shipment, it may also include customs duties and other taxes. The total cost of goods purchased generally includes the purchase price and additional charges, such as freight or other shipping costs and insurance; for an international shipment, it may also include customs duties and other taxes. All these charges, often referred to as **landed costs**, affect the total product cost. Landed costs are the costs incurred, beyond the purchase price the supplier charges for the goods, in the process of bringing the goods to one of your company's warehouses. To accurately calculate the total product cost, you must consider all landed costs. By accurately analysing total product cost statistics, your company can assign the most appropriate prices to the products you sell. ## Landed cost code definition In Visma Net, landed cost codes are used to capture various types of landed costs. For each type of landed costs your company may encounter, create a landed cost code to be used to enter and process that type of landed costs. Most landed costs are not fixed amounts associated with a specific stock item. Landed costs may be fees, such as for shipping and handling, whose amount depends on a shipment's weight, volume, or quantity of items. Accordingly, you need to define how to allocate the incurred amounts among all items in the shipment. The landed cost amounts are ultimately paid to a carrier or customs office (the landed cost supplier) rather than to the supplier that sells the goods. In Visma Net, you create and maintain landed cost codes by using the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window. For each code, you specify the following information: + How the landed cost amount should be allocated among all goods in the shipment. Landed costs can be allocated to stock items based on their quantity, volume, cost, or weight. + What type of landed cost this is. + Which landed cost supplier provides the services. Only suppliers with the **Landed cost supplier** check box selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window can be associated with the code. + What account and subaccount is used to accrue landed cost amounts (the Landed cost accrual account and Landed cost accrual account subaccount). + What payment terms are used by the landed cost supplier. + How the landed cost is applied in the Purchases workspace, in the Supplier ledger workspace, or in both workspaces. Some of the landed costs, such as freight, are typically known when the goods are received, and can always be specified directly on purchase or transfer receipts in the Purchases workspace. Landed costs of other types may become known later, and can be entered in the Supplier ledger workspace, on an invoice associated with the original receipt. Some landed costs can be applied in either the Supplier ledger workspace or the Purchases workspace. For details, see [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). + What VAT category is used if the landed costs are service charges subject to taxes. A landed cost code is not associated with any specific currency, so if multi-currency support has been enabled in the system, landed costs are considered as specified in the currency of the document. ## Landed cost allocation method The allocation method of a landed cost defines how the landed cost is distributed among stock items (line items) specified in the document. When you are creating a landed cost code for specific type of landed cost, you can select one of the following allocation methods: By quantity : The landed cost amount is distributed among the line items in proportion to their quantities. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost to the goods purchased in the largest quantities. If units of measure (UoMs) other than the base UoMs are specified for items, item quantities are calculated with respect to the base UoMs. CAUTION: Use this option for only purchase orders that include similar items with the same base UoM or similar base UoMs. Do not use this option for purchase orders that include disparate items with base units that cannot be compared, such as pallets and tons, or meters and pounds. By cost : The landed cost amount is distributed among the line items in proportion to their extended cost. The extended cost is calculated based on the item's valuation method. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost amount to more expensive goods. By weight : The landed cost amount is distributed among the stock items proportionally to their weights. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost to the goods that weigh the most. The weight of the base unit of the stock item is specified on the **Packaging** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. By volume : The landed cost amount is distributed among the applicable items proportionally to their volumes. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost to goods with more bulk. The volume of the base unit of the stock item is specified on the **Packaging** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. When you add the landed costs to a purchase or transfer receipt or to an invoice with multiple receipts, you can always select specific items whose costs must be updated by the landed costs. On release of the landed cost document, the system generates an inventory adjustment for the stock items listed in the landed cost document. The amount of landed cost to be added to the cost of a particular stock item listed on the adjustment is calculated according to the allocation method.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About landed cost application scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios page With Visma Net, your company can track landed costs incurred for purchased or transferred stock items, to accurately calculate the total costs of the items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About landed cost application scenarios With Visma Net, your company can track landed costs incurred for purchased or transferred stock items, to accurately calculate the total costs of the items. ## Typical scenarios of adding landed costs Some of the landed costs, such as freight, are typically known when the goods are received and can be applied to purchase or transfer receipts in the Purchases workspace. Other types of landed costs may become known later, when an invoice from the service provider is received; these landed costs must be specified on an invoice in the Supplier ledger workspace that is linked to the appropriate purchase or transfer receipts. Also, there may be landed costs that can be applied in either of these ways: on a receipt or on an invoice. The way the landed costs of a particular type must be applied to item costs is defined by the application method selected for the appropriate landed cost code. There are two typical scenarios, then, of users tracking landed costs associated with the received items. The scenarios that are possible for the landed costs of specific type are defined by the option selected in the **Application method** field in the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window: + I. **From purchase order**: The landed costs are added directly to a purchase or transfer receipt. + II. **From supplier** The landed costs are added to an invoice that can be associated with an existing purchase or transfer receipt. If the **From both** option is selected the **Application method** field, either of scenarios can be applied. This topic describes how the landed costs can be specified for purchase receipts. ## Scenario I: Landed costs added to purchase or transfer receipt With this scenario, while you are entering a receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you also enter the landed costs whose codes specify that they are applicable in the Purchases workspace or in both the Purchases and Supplier ledger workspaces. On the **Landed costs** tab of the window, select the landed cost code and specify the landed cost amount. When you release a receipt with landed costs specified, the following documents are generated: + An invoice to be paid to the supplier of the goods + One invoice or multiple invoices to be paid to each landed cost supplier (such as a carrier or customs office) with the landed cost code that was specified on the receipt + A receipt in the Inventory workspace for the goods received into inventory at a specific warehouse + Inventory adjustments that update stock item costs in accordance with the allocation method of the landed cost code, with as many adjustments for each item as there are different landed cost codes. If you configure landed cost codes that allow landed costs to be added directly to a purchase order receipt, you can select the **Release inventory documents automatically** option in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window to make sure that the item costs will be promptly updated. If the inventory adjustments were not created, which can happen if some of the accounts and subaccounts required for landed cost processing were not specified for stock items mentioned in the receipt, you use the [Release landed costs (AP506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-landed-costs-from-purchase-invoices-ap506500/) window to generate these adjustments. The receipt is visible on one window, the other, or both, depending on the application method (**From purchase order**, or **From both** method) selected for the landed cost code. When you need to enter the landed costs of a specific type on the purchase receipt, if the exact amount of the landed costs is not known, you can enter the estimated amount under this landed cost code. Later, when the exact amount becomes known, on the purchase invoice generated for the receipt, you can manually adjust the amount of the landed costs. The difference between the previous amount and the adjusted amount is automatically added to the **Landed cost variance** account specified in the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window for the landed cost used on the original receipt. ## Scenario II: Landed costs added to an invoice With this scenario, you can enter an invoice from the landed cost supplier responsible for additional charges by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Such an invoice should be associated with the original purchase receipt or receipts. In this window, you can specify only landed costs with codes that allow application in the Suppliers workspace or both the Suppliers and Purchases workspaces. These costs, even though they are entered after the purchase, should also update inventory costs. Before you create an invoice for landed costs, make sure that the original purchase receipt and the inventory receipt are released. On release of such a landed cost invoice, inventory adjustments (for all stock items mentioned in the associated receipts) are generated to update the product costs. If an inventory adjustment was not generated automatically because some of the accounts were not specified, use the [Release landed costs (AP506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-landed-costs-from-purchase-invoices-ap506500/) window to manually generate these adjustments for each invoice. ## Cost updating Upon release, an inventory adjustment updates the inventory costs of items differently depending on the valuation method of the item: + For stock items with the **FIFO** or **Specific** valuation method, the cost on the particular cost layer (created by the receipt) is updated as follows: + If the layer still has the original quantity, the cost of all items on the layer is updated, and the landed cost amount from the landed cost accrual account is transferred to the inventory account assigned to the item. + If the current quantity on the layer is less than the original quantity, the landed cost amount is moved from the landed cost accrual account to update the Landed cost variance account and the Inventory account in proportion with the sold and unsold quantities, respectively. (If you need to adjust the sales account on release of the inventory adjustment, you can use the same account for the COGS account and the landed cost variance account.) + For items with the **Average** valuation method, the landed cost amount from the landed cost accrual account is transferred to the inventory account assigned to the item and updates the average cost of the unit. At the moment of inventory adjustment release, if some of the units (listed on the purchase receipt) were sold, the landed cost amount updates both the landed cost variance account and the inventory account of the item proportionally to the unsold and sold quantities (as on the original purchase receipt), respectively. + For the **Standard cost** valuation method, the amount from the landed cost accrual account is moved to the landed cost variance account. [../so-landed-cost-transfers-con.html](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-landed-costs-for-transfers/) Purchases windows /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases windows Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Purchases windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Purchases workspace. ## Transactions [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) ## Registers [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) ## Processes [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) [Print/e-mail purchase orders (PO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/print-email-purchase-orders-po503000/) [Release purchase receipts (PO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-purchase-receipts-po501000/) [Release landed costs (PO506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-landed-costs-from-receipts-po506000/) ## Inquiries [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) [Purchase order list (PO40100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-list-po40100s/) [Purchase history by items (PO40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-history-by-item-po40101s/) ## Reports [Purchase order summary (PO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-summary-po610500/) For the time interval you select, shows summary information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. [Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-supplier-po611000/) For the time interval you select, displays detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in this report is grouped by supplier. [Purchase order details by stock item (PO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-item-po611500/) For the time interval you select, gives you detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in this report is grouped by item. [Purchase order details by account (PO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000/) For the time interval you select, gives you detailed information about purchase order lines with non-stock items. The data in this report is grouped by expense accounts (and expense subaccounts) specified in purchase orders. [Purchase receipt summary (PO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-summary-po620500/) Displays detailed information about purchase receipts and returns created in the Purchases workspace. [Purchase receipt history (PO643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-history-po643000/) Shows detailed information about the receipts performed on purchase orders. [Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-details-by-supplier-po621000/) Presents detailed information about purchase receipts and returns created in the Purchases workspace, with the data grouped by supplier. [Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po630500/) Displays summary information for the purchase receipts and returns by the accounts they used. [Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-details-po631000/) Shows detailed information for the purchase receipts and returns by the accounts they used. [Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-summary-po631500/) Provides summary information for the invoices generated upon the purchase receipts and returns. [Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-details-po632000/) Displays detailed information for the invoices generated upon the purchase receipts and returns. [Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-allocated-and-back-ordered-po622000/) Displays detailed information on allocations related to the items listed on receipts (of all statuses) for transfer and purchase orders. ## Preferences [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) ## Other [Purchase receipt (PO646000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000/) Purchase order preferences (PO101000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000 page You use this window to provide the general settings for the Purchases workspace, such as number series for purchasing documents, validation requirements for purchase orders and receipts, approval and mailing settings, and the default freight expense account and subaccount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order preferences (PO101000) You use this window to provide the general settings for the Purchases workspace, such as number series for purchasing documents, validation requirements for purchase orders and receipts, approval and mailing settings, and the default freight expense account and subaccount. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The General settings tab This tab contains three groups of settings that affect the basic operations available in the Purchases workspace. ### The Purchase order numbering settings section In this section, you can specify the number series to be used for purchase orders and receipts created in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) and [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) windows.
Element Description
Blanket order number series

The number series used for assigning order numbers to purchase orders of the Blanket type.

This field is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Regular order number series The number series used for assigning order numbers to purchase orders of all other types except Blanket.
Receipt number series The number series used for assigning reference numbers to purchase receipts.
### The Validate total on entry section This section includes options to require validation of document totals during data entry for purchase receipts as well as various types of purchase orders.
Element Description
For receipts

When this check box is selected, the system will validate totals for purchase receipts on entry.

Note

To save a receipt with the Hold check box cleared, you have to enter the total amount of the order in the Control amount field and the total quantity in the Control qty. field in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

For normal and default orders

When this check box is selected, you have to validate the total amounts of purchase orders with the Normal and Standard types on entry.

Note

To save an order with the Hold check box cleared, you have to enter the total amount of the order in the Control amount field in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

For blanket orders

When this check box is selected, the system will validate the total amount for purchase orders with the Blanket type on entry.

Note

To save an order with the Hold check box cleared, you must enter the total amount in the Control amount field in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This check box is displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For drop-ship orders

When this check box is selected, the system will validate totals for purchase orders with the Drop-ship type during data entry.

Note

To save an order with the Hold check box cleared, you have to enter the total amount in the Control amount field in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This check box is displayed if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

### The Purchase price variance allocation section This section includes options that control how the purchase price variance amounts are processed in the system.
Element Description
Allocation mode

The mode of allocating the purchase price variance amounts. You can select one of the following options:

Inventory account
For stock items, to record the variance amounts to the inventory accounts, thus updating the costs. For non-stock items, to record the variance amounts to the expense account.
Purchase price variance account
For stock and non-stock items, to record any variance amounts to the purchase variance accounts.
Reason code

The reason code used as a source of accounts and subaccounts for transactions that allocate the purchase price variance amounts.

This field is available if Inventory is selected in the Allocation mode field.

### The Other section Use this section to specify the account and subaccount to be used to record freight expenses incurred on purchases, as well as miscellaneous settings related to document processing.
Element Description
Create invoice on receipt release

This check box determines the default value for the Create invoice check box in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window; the user creating a receipt can override this value if needed for the particular receipt.

For the convenience of users, select this check box if invoices should be generated automatically for most receipts. Clear this check box if users should enter invoices manually for most receipts.

Freight expense account

The default account to be used to accrue the freight expenses incurred in purchasing.

The freight amounts from purchase order lines with the Freight type and no ship via code specified in the Supplier location column will be posted to this account.

Freight expense sub. The corresponding default subaccount to be used to accrue the freight expenses.
Reason code purchase order returns The default reason code to be used for all purchase returns.
Release inventory documents automatically When this check box is selected, inventory receipts will be automatically released on release of purchase receipts.
Release LC IN adjustments automatically When this check box is selected, inventory adjustments for landed costs will be released automatically on release of purchase receipts.
Release supplier documents automatically When this check box is selected, all supplier documents associated with purchase receipts will be released automatically.
Complete purchase order line automatically

When this check box is selected, purchase order lines added to a receipt are completed automatically when:

  • the purchase receipt is released,
  • the line is deleted from the purchase receipt.

If you do not want a purchase order line to be completed when it is deleted from a purchase receipt, but you still want purchase order lines to be completed upon release of the purchase receipt, select Complete purchase order line in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

Hold receipts on entry

When this check box is selected, purchase receipts will be saved with the On hold status by default.

If the check box is cleared, the documents will be saved with the Balanced status by default.

Do not check alt. item ID on creation of purchase receipt When this check box is selected, the system allows you to create a purchase receipt in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window, when an item’s alternative item ID has been changed since the purchase order was created.
Use purchase receipts to process service lines from normal purchase orders

When this check box is not selected, service lines are not copied from a purchase order to the corresponding purchase receipt. Also, they cannot be added manually to the purchase receipt by clicking Add purchase order or Add purchase order line in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. Service lines are invoiced directly from the purchase order. After a purchase invoice has been prepared for a purchase order line, it is not possible to create a second unreleased invoice for this line.

When this check box is selected, service lines are copied to a purchase receipt prepared for a purchase order that includes these lines; these lines cannot be invoiced directly from the purchase order.

Use purchase receipts to process service lines from drop-ship orders

When this check box is not selected, service lines are not copied from a drop-ship order to the corresponding purchase receipt. Also, they cannot be added manually to the purchase receipt by clicking Add purchase order or Add purchase order line in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. Service lines are invoiced directly from the drop-ship order. After a purchase invoice has been prepared for a purchase order line, it is not possible to create a second unreleased invoice for this line.

When this check box is selected, service lines are copied to a purchase receipt prepared for a drop-ship order that includes these lines; these lines cannot be invoiced directly from the purchase order.

Update sub. on order owner change

When this check box is selected, the expense subaccount shown for each non-stock item listed on a document will be updated when the document is assigned to another owner.

The expense subaccount is combined (according to the posting class of the expense) from multiple related subaccounts, including (if applicable) the subaccount associated with the employee handling the order or receipt.

Copy line descriptions from sales orders When this check box is selected, line descriptions will be copied from sales orders to purchase orders that are based on these sales orders.
Copy line notes from sales orders When this check box is selected, line notes will be copied from sales orders to purchase orders that are based on these sales orders.
Automatically add receipt line for barcode

When this check box is selected and a barcode scanner is used, lines will be added to purchase receipts automatically once a barcode is scanned or entered.

The selected option is used as the default option for the Add receipt line dialog box, which is called from the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window when you click Add line on the Document details tab.

Add one unit per barcode

The selected option is used as the default option in the Add receipt line dialog box, which is called from the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

When this check box is selected, the item quantity will be increased by one unit each time an item barcode is entered into the system, manually or by using a barcode scanner.

Default shipping dest. type

The way the destination shipping address is selected for purchase orders when the orders are created in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window. Select one of the following options:

Branch
To use the address of the branch associated with the order as the default destination.
Warehouse
To use the address of the warehouse associated with the order as the default destination.

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Default receipt quantity

The quantity that the system should specify on a new receipt by default. Select one of the following options:

Open quantity
To specify an item quantity from a purchase order or an order line added to the receipt.
Zero
To set zero quantity so that the users have to type the quantity manually.
## The Reporting settings tab This tab contains a list of predefined mailings that you can use for sending purchase orders and other documents to suppliers electronically (by email). Mailing settings specified on this tab are used as the default values for mailing settings specified for supplier classes, which in turn are used as the default values for setting up mailings for particular suppliers. This tab contains the following tables: **Default sources** and **Default recipients**. ### The Default sources table In this table, you can view and modify the active mailings to be used to send emails to suppliers and employees. For each mailing, you can select either a report or an email template to be used by default as the body of the email.
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of the mailing.
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The report that, by default, will be used to structure the information available in a purchase order. For the email, the report will be used as the email’s body (or attachment), if a report is used rather than an email template.
Notification template The template to be used by default to generate emails for the mailing, if an email template is used rather than a report.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no preferences are specified for a particular recipient in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. Select one of the following: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, this mailing is active. Emails are generated only for active mailings.
### The Default recipients table This table contains the default recipient types for the mailing selected in the **Default sources** table. Generally, this list provides default contact types for supplier classes if any of these mailings will be selected for a class.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails for the mailing. Choose one of the following options:

Primary
The primary contact of the supplier.
Remittance
A remittance contact of the supplier.
Shipping
A shipping contact of the supplier.
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the documents of the specific supplier classes or specific suppliers, or is otherwise associated with either of them.
Contact ID

The specific contact.

This column is not used for supplier contacts or the Primary, Remittance, and Shipping settings in the Contact type column. If you have selected the Employee type, you can select one of your company’s employees here; this person will receive all emails generated for this mailing in the Purchases workspace, if the mailing is active.

Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to recipients of this type. Select one of the following: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, the recipient is active. Only active recipients can be configured to receive emails for the mailing.
Bcc When this check box is selected, the recipient will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails for the selected mailing.
Purchase orders (PO301000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000 page In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new ones, and add lines to existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase orders (PO301000) In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new ones, and add lines to existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new ones, and add lines to existing ones. You can create a purchase order based on an existing sales order or by adding separate lines of different sales orders. Once an order has been saved, it can be approved, rejected, or cancelled by any of the employees assigned to review this purchase order. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a drop-ship order flow](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow/) + [Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-a-cash-on-delivery-cod-transaction/) ## The top part
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

Email purchase order
Emails (according to the settings of the PURCHASE ORDER mailing) the order to the supplier specified in this order.
Mark as do not email
Selects the Do not email check box (on the Other information tab) for the purchase order, to skip the step of emailing the purchase order.
Create purchase receipt
Creates a purchase receipt when the ordered items listed in this purchase order are received. This action opens the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window with a new receipt that has all the details copied from the purchase order. Note that options Do not print and Do not email on the Other information tab need to be cleared when you want to create a purchase receipt.
Create purchase invoice
Creates a purchase invoice based on the current purchase order. This action opens the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window with a new purchase invoice that has all the details copied from the purchase order.
Complete order
Completes the current purchase order when no more receipts are expected for the order.
Cancel order
Cancels the purchase order, which changes its status to Cancelled. You cannot edit an order with this status nor associate receipts with it. You can later manually change its status to On hold (by selecting the Hold check box) and edit the order.
Recalculate prices
Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, where you can specify the extent to which you want to refresh the prices and discounts for the document.
Create prepayment
Creates a prepayment linked to this purchase order. The system opens the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window with a new prepayment request (based on the purchase order) ready to be saved. You can use the prepayment to pay for this order directly when the goods are received.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands with quick access to inquiry windows:

Supplier details
Opens the Supplier details (AP402000) window, which displays the data related to the supplier from which the goods in this order are ordered.
Supplier documents
Displays the list of supplier documents related to this purchase order.
Reports

Includes the following menu commands you can click for quick navigation to the following reports:

Print purchase order
To print the current purchase order by using the Purchase order (PO641000) report.
View purchase receipt history
To view the Purchase receipt history (PO643000) report showing all purchase receipts related to this purchase order.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used for updating prices (referred to in purchase orders as unit costs) and discounts for the purchase order.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. Select one of the following options:

Current line
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line.
All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines.
Set current unit prices When this check box is selected, the system will replace the item prices with the current prices in the selected line or all lines.
Override manual prices

When this check box is selected, the system will replace the item prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit cost or Ext. cost column) with the current prices.

This check box is available only if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.

Recalculate discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will recalculate the discounts for the selected line or the all lines.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Override manual line discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will cancel the manual discounts for the selected line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate box) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
### The top part elements
Element Description
Type

The type of the purchase order, which can be one of these options:

Normal
A purchase order for products and services that are purchased on invoice or paid in cash. This is the most common type of purchase orders.
Drop-ship
A purchase order for goods that are delivered directly from the supplier to the customer. The list of items and the shipping instructions are copied automatically from drop-ship sales orders to the drop-ship purchase order. This option is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Blanket
A purchase order for a large stock quantity that exceeds the quantity that is currently needed. This order reserves a certain quantity of supplier inventory for future purchasing. You can use blanket orders to purchase products that are rarely available from suppliers or that have special discounts for high volumes. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default
A purchase order that includes the products purchased regularly in the same quantities from a specific supplier and that can be processed repeatedly. Orders of this type are used when the demand for ordered products is predictable and does not change over time. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Order no. The unique number of the purchase order, which the system assigns based on the number series assigned to purchase orders of this type, as specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the purchase order gets the On hold status when it is created. You can clear the check box to change the status of the order to Open.

You are able change the supplier on a purchase order with order lines if the status of the order is On hold.

Status

The system-generated status of the purchase order, which can be one of the following options:

On hold
The purchase order is a draft and can be edited manually.
Open
The order was processed in accordance with the settings in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window but has not been completed yet.
Pending printing
Printing is required for the document but has not been done yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Print order option is selected for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Pending email
Emailing is required for this document, but it has not been performed yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Email order option in the Suppliers (AP303000) window is selected for the supplier.
Closed
All the ordered goods have been received.
Cancelled
The order was cancelled through the Cancel order action on the Actions menu of the toolbar. You cannot edit an order with this status, and purchase receipts cannot be based on it.
Date The date when the purchase order was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Delivery date The date when the supplier promised that the items listed in the order will arrive to their destination location.
Description A brief description of the purchase order.
Supplier The supplier from which the items will be purchased. For transfer requests, it is a branch of your organisation.
Location

The supplier location from which the items will be received.

This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Owner The user name of the employee who is responsible for the purchase order.
Currency The currency the purchase order will be paid in.
View base/View currency When you click View base in the Currency column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency, if the currency of the document is other than your base currency. Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the supplier document related to this purchase order. This information is required if the Require supplier reference check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Line total The total sum of the amount entries for all lines in the current purchase order. This value is calculated by the system and you cannot manually change it.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected on the VAT details tab.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will only be displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000)window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty. If the document contains multiple transactions with different VATs applied and each of them has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

This field is available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The total VAT amount for all lines added to the current purchase order. This value, also calculated by the system, is the sum of the VAT amounts for each line.
Order total The total sum for the purchase order, including VAT. This read-only value is the sum of the Line total and VAT total values.
Control total The order’s total amount (including VAT), which you must enter manually when you attempt to save the order with the Balanced status.
## The Document details tab The **Document details** tab includes a table with detailed information about the items to be purchased according to the purchase order. When you select a line in the table, more information about the availability for the line item is displayed in the table footer. See the table footer description below for more information.
Button Description
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box where you can find a stock item in the list of existing stock items at a selected warehouse and include this item in the current document.
View sales order demand Opens the Demand dialog box, which displays the items in demand on open sales orders.
Add standard order

Opens the Add purchase order dialog box where you can select an existing purchase order and include it in the current document.

This button is displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Add standard order line

Opens the Add purchase order line dialog box where you can select lines from existing purchase orders and include them in the current document.

This button is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

### The table columns
Column Description
Item ID

The ID of the item.

You can select non-stock items as well as stock items.

Line type

The type of the purchase order line, which can be one of the following:

  • Goods for warehouse This line is a stock item not linked to any sales order.
  • Goods for sales order This line is linked to a sales order line marked for purchasing.
  • Goods for RP This line is intended for replenishment.
  • Goods for drop-ship This line is linked to a sales order line marked for drop-shipment.
  • Non-stock for drop-ship This line is linked to a sales order line marked for drop-shipment.

This option is available for a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

  • Non-stock for sales order This line is linked to a sales order line marked for purchasing.

This option is available for a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

  • Non-stock This line is a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
  • Service This line type is a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is cleared in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
  • Freight This line is a freight expense to be posted directly to an expense account without allocation. The default freight expense account is specified in the Freight expense account field in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window. If you need to allocate the freight expenses, add them as landed costs.
  • Description This is an informational text line.
Line description A description of the purchase order line, which is copied from the item’s description.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
Warehouse

The warehouse to receive the item listed on the order.

This column is available only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

UoM The unit of measure (UoM) in which the quantity of the item is specified. If the value in the Qty. on receipts column is greater than zero, you cannot change the UoM for this line.
Order qty. The quantity of the item that has been ordered.
Base order qty. The quantity of the line in the base UoM of the item.
Qty. on receipts The quantity of the item that has been received according to all receipts, including the unreleased ones, based on the current purchase order.
Unit cost

The cost per UoM of the item.

If you had entered the unit cost (supplier price) manually and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date.

If you want to replace this value by the supplier price currently available for the item, use the Recalculate prices action.

Cost The total cost of the items on the line.
Discount percent

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is not enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the percent of the discount that has been entered manually or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item.

If the Supplier customer and discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

Discount amount

If the Supplier customer discounts functionality is not enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the amount of the discount that has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually.

If the Supplier customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.

Manual discount When this check box is selected, the discount has been applied manually. You can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, or you can select the discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application.
Discount code

The code of the line discount that will be applied on this line.

This column is displayed if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount series

The ID of the discount series connected with the discount code that has been applied to this line.

The column is hidden by default and is only displayed if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Disc. unit cost The discounted unit cost of the item, if a discount is applied.
Amount The calculated amount of the item (after the discount has been taken).
Received amount The amount of the item received on this purchase order. The system automatically calculates this value by using the data available on purchase receipts associated with this purchase order, including unreleased purchase receipts.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID used for this item by the supplier. The system inserts the Alt. item ID value (if any) defined for the specified supplier in a line of the Supplier part number type on the Cross-reference tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Alternate description

The description of the alternative ID used for this item by the supplier.

The system inserts the description defined for the specified supplier in a line of the Supplier part number type on the Cross-reference tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

Min. receipt (%) The minimum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse if the receipt action is Rejected. You can accept a larger quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is less than the percentage specified as max. receipt (%).
Max. receipt (%)

The maximum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse if the receipt action is Rejected. If a larger quantity arrives, the item will not be accepted.

You can accept a smaller quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is greater than the percentage specified as Min. receipt (%). The default value is specified for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.

Complete on (%) The minimum percentage of the ordered quantity for the item that must be received to complete the purchase order line (gets the default value from the Threshold receipt (%) setting of the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window).
Receipt action

The action that should be performed when the ordered item is received if its quantity is greater than the maximum receipt value or less than the minimum receipt value calculated based on the line’s ordered quantity. The following options are available:

Reject
The item on this line of the purchase order will be rejected.
Accept but warn
The item on this line of the purchase order will be accepted, but the system will display a warning.
Accept
The item will be accepted.
VAT category The VAT category assigned to the ordered item.
Account

The expense account used to record the purchased non-stock item that does not require receipt (by default, the account specified for the item in the Combine COGS/expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

You can select an account manually.

Description The description of the account used.
Sub. ID The subaccount used to record the purchased non-stock item that does not require receipt (by default, the subaccount generated in accordance with the rule defined in the Combine COGS/expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Project The project with which this purchase order line is associated.
Project task The project task with which this purchase order is associated. For a line with a stock item, you can select this project task only if the specified warehouse has a warehouse location assigned to this project task.
Completed When this check box is selected, the purchasing of the item on the line has been completed.
Complete purchase order line The way the purchase line is completed, by its quantity or by its amount.
Cancelled When this check box is selected, this line has been cancelled.
Order type The order type of the order.
Order no. The order number of a blanket or standard order.
Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
Retainage (%) The percent of the retainage amount to be retained from the line amount. The default percent value is copied to each newly added purchase order line from the Retainage (%) field on the Other information tab. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
Retainage amount The amount to be retained from the line amount. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
### The table footer When you select a line, more information about the line item is displayed in the table footer.
Element Description
On hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the warehouse.
available The quantity available of the item at the specified warehouse, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected warehouse.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

on purchase orders The quantity of the item specified on existing purchase orders with the Open status.
on purchase receipts The quantity of the item specified on unreleased purchase receipts.
### The Add item dialog box This dialog box provides information on the availability of the supplier's item or items at your company's warehouses; you can add the appropriate quantity of the item to the document if needed. To find an item, type a string from its item ID or barcode in the **Item** field.
Element Description
Item A field you can use to search for a particular item or items by a string that is a part of the item IDs of the items.
Barcode A string that represents the barcode of the items you want to find.
Only supplier’s items When this check box is selected, search includes only items that are associated with the supplier on this document.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item you want to find is stored. You can leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.

This field is displayed if the Multiple warehouse functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Item class ID The item class of the item for which you want to view the availability.
Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of the item you want to add to the current document.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the item is stored.
Item ID The unique ID of the item.
Description A description of the item.
Purchase unit The purchase unit of the item.
Qty. available The quantity of the stock item currently available at the warehouse.
Qty. on hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the warehouse.
Qty. on purchase orders The quantity of the stock item specified on existing purchase orders with the Open status.
Qty. on purchase receipts The quantity of the stock item specified on unreleased purchase receipts.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID used for the this item.
Alt. item ID type The type of the alternative item ID; Supplier part number, Customer part number, Barcode, or Global.
Alternate description The alternative item ID description of the item.
Default supplier The number of the default supplier for the item.
Default supplier name The name of the default supplier for the item.
Item class ID The ID of the item class in which the item is included.
Item class description The description of the item class in which the item is included.
Price class ID The ID of the price class in which the item is included.
Price class description The description of the price class in which the item is included.
Add (button) Adds the selected items (those with the Included check boxes selected) to the current purchase order.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected items (those with the Included check boxes selected) to the current purchase order and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box without adding any items to the current purchase order.
### The Add standard order dialog box This dialog box displays a table showing the existing purchase orders for the supplier specified for this purchase order. For purchase orders of types other than **Normal**, adding a purchase order is not supported. This dialog box is only displayed if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Column Description
Type The type of purchase order to be added to the current order.
Order no. The order number of the purchase order to be added to the current one.
Date The date when the added purchase order was created.
Expired on The expiration date of the added purchase order, if it is the Blanket type.
Status The status of the purchase order.
Currency The currency of the purchase order.
Order total The total value of the purchase order.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference number specified for the purchase order.
Terms The payment terms of the purchase order.
Description The description specified for the purchase order.
Open qty. The quantity of the ordered items yet to be received for the purchase order.
Open amt. The corresponding amount calculated for the ordered but not yet received item quantity.
Save (button) Adds the selected purchase orders and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Add standard order line dialog box You use this dialog box to add a line or multiple lines from an existing purchase order to the current purchase order, as long as both orders have the same supplier. This dialog box is displayed if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, and only from purchase orders of the **Normal** type. You can add lines from **Standard** or **Blanket** purchase orders only.
Column Description
Type The type of purchase order from which lines will be added: Blanket or Standard.
Order no. The order number of the purchase order from which lines will be added.
Line type The type of this purchase order line.
Item ID The item ID of the ordered item.
UoM The unit of measure of the item on the purchase order line.
Order qty. The quantity of the item that has been ordered.
Open qty. The quantity of the item yet to be received according to the purchase order line.
Line description The description of the purchase order line.
Min. receipt (%) The minimum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse. If a smaller quantity arrives, the item will not be accepted. You can accept a larger quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is less than the percentage specified as the max. receipt (%) value.
Max. receipt (%) The maximum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse. If a larger quantity arrives, the item will not be accepted. You can accept a smaller quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is greater than the percentage specified as the min. receipt (%) value.
Receipt action The action that will be performed on receipt of the ordered item if the received quantity is greater than the max. receipt value or less than the min. receipt value: Reject, Accept but Warn, or Accept
Save (button) Adds the selected purchase order lines and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels any changes and closes the dialog box.
## The VAT details tab This tab has a table that holds information related to the VAT to be paid on the purchase of the ordered items.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the current purchase order.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for this document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for this document.
Include in VAT exempt total When this check box is selected, the amount of the line is included in the VAT exempt total amount of the document.
Pending VAT When this check box is selected, there is pending VAT on the line.
Retained taxable The retained taxable amount for this document. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
Retained VAT The retained VAT amount for this document. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
Statistical VAT When this check box is selected, there is statistical VAT on the line.
Reverse VAT When this check box is selected, there is reverse VAT on the line.
VAT type The description of the VAT type on the line.
## The Shipping instructions tab This tab contains detailed information related to the shipping of the ordered items. ### The Shipping details section In this section, you provide shipping instructions for this purchase order.
Element Description
Shipping destination type

The type of the shipping destination:

  • Branch (meaning a branch of your company)
  • Customer
  • Supplier
  • Warehouse

The default shipping destination is specified in the Purchase orders preferences (PO101000) window.

Ship to

The particular destination of the selected type. For the Branch type, the field displays the list of branches. For the Customer or Supplier type, the field displays the list of customers or suppliers, respectively.

The field does not appear for the Warehouse type of destination. You will see the Warehouse field instead.

Shipping location The location from which the order is to be shipped. The field does not appear for the Warehouse type of destination.
### The Delivery address contact section Here you can specify additional shipping details.
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default contact settings for this shipping destination.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Business name The supplier’s shipping department name, if it is different from the supplier’s business name.
Business name The supplier’s shipping department name, if it is different from the supplier’s business name.
Phone 1 The main phone number of the person to contact on matters related to shipping of this purchase order.
### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default address settings for this shipping destination.
Address 1 The first line of the address for the selected destination.
Address 2 The second line of the address for the destination.
Postcode The postcode for the destination.
City The city where the destination is located.
Country The country of the destination.
County The county where the destination is located.
### The Ship via section Here you can specify additional shipping details.
Element Description
FOB point The location where title for the shipment passes from the supplier to your company.
Ship via The carrier selected to ship the goods for the purchase order.
Shipping terms The shipping terms to be used for this shipping.
## The Supplier info tab This tab contains detailed information about the supplier to supply the ordered goods. ### The Supplier contact section In this section, you provide the supplier's address and contact information.
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default contact settings for the supplier.
Business name The business name of the supplier contact for matters related to this purchase order.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The main phone number of the supplier contact for matters related to this purchase order.
Email The email address of the supplier contact for matters related to this purchase order.
### The Supplier address section
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default shipping address for the supplier.
Address 1 The first line of the supplier’s contact address.
Address 2 The second line of the supplier’s contact address.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier’s contact address.
City The city of the supplier’s contact address.
Country The country of the supplier’s contact address.
County The county of the supplier’s contact address.
### The Info section Here you can specify shipment terms for the purchase order.
Element Description
Terms The specific payment terms to be used for the purchase order.
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier’s location.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table that shows the details of the supplier discounts that were applied to the document. It is available if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount When this check box is selected, you can cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the document. Selecting the check box updates the document’s total and line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Discount code The discount code of the supplier discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series connected with the discount code applied to the document.
Type The type of discount applied to the document ( Group or Document ).
Manual discount When this check box is selected, the supplier discount shown on this line has been applied manually from the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as manual in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window.
Discountable amount The amount used as the basis for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as the basis for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the item quantity.
Discount amount The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item.
Retained discount The part of the discount deducted from the retained amount. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
## The Change orders tab You use this tab to view change orders related to the project and create new ones. To use the change orders functionality, enable it in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Column Description
Ref. no The number of the change order.
Class The class of the change order, which is defined in the Change order classes (PM203000) window.
Revenue change no. The number of the change order that affects the project revenue within the project, which the system uses for printing. The revenue change number is an integer that the system assigns sequentially, starting from 1 and then 2, 3, and so on.
Description The description provided for the change order.
Status

The status of the change order, which can be one of the following:

On hold
The change order is a draft that you can edit but not release.
Pending approval
The change order is pending the approval of the employee who has been assigned to approve the change order.
Rejected
The employee who was assigned to approve the change order has rejected it.
Open
The change order is ready to be released.
Closed
The change order has been released.
Change date The date on which the changes made on the change order should be recorded in the project balances.
Approval date The date that is communicated to the customer as the approval date of the agreed-upon changes.
Contract change time, days A positive or negative number of days that represents the delay of the contract, used in reports.
External reference no. The external reference number of the change order.
Reverse status

The reverse status of the change order, which can be one of the following:

None
The change order is a normal change order.
Reversing
The change order is a reversing change order that reverses the impact of the original change order, whose reference number is shown in the Original CO ref. no. column.
Reversed
The change order has been reversed.
Orig. CO ref. no The reference number of the original change order that the current change order reverses.
Project The project to which the change order is connected.
Project task The project task to which the change order is connected.
Item ID The ID of the item on the change order.
Description The description ID of the item on the change order.
Quantity The quantity of the item on the change order.
UoM The unit of measure of the item on the change order.
Unit cost The unit cost of the item on the change order.
Amount The amount of the item on the change order.
## The Other information tab This tab contains other information related to the purchase order, such as the branch ordering the goods or services, the work group, and the reference numbers of the related documents (requisition document, sales order, and prepayment).
Element Description
Branch The branch associated with the purchase order.
Sales order type The type of the sales order associated with the purchase order.
Sales order no. The number of the sales order associated with the purchase order.
Prepayment ref. no. The reference number of the prepayment request linked to this purchase order, if any.
Work group ID The work group to which the purchase order was assigned for processing.
Do not print

A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.

This check box is selected by default if the Print orders check box is not selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, the Purchase settings tab.

Printed When this check box is selected, the current purchase order has been printed. To print the purchase order, select Print purchase order on the Reports menu.
Do not email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.

This check box is selected by default if the Send orders by email check box is not selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, the Purchase settings tab.

Emailed When this check box is selected, the current purchase order has been emailed. To email a purchase order, select Email purchase order on the Actions menu.
Open quantity The difference between the quantities of ordered and received items. The system calculates this value based on released receipts only.
Open amount The amount of the items that are ordered but not received. The system calculates the open amount based on released receipts only.
### The Report settings section The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Print order description Select this check box to print the order description.
Print notes Select this check box to print notes.
Apply retainage

When this is selected, retainage will be applied on the invoices.

This functionality is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Retainage (%) The percent that is applied to calculate the amount to be retained for the line. This field appears if the Apply retainage check box is selected.
## The Purchase receipts tab This tab has a table that shows the details of the receipts that include the items from this purchase order.
Column Description
Type The type of the receipt document.
Receipt no. The reference number of the receipt document.
Status

The status of the document:

  • On hold:
  • Balanced
  • Released:
Supplier name The supplier on the order.
Currency The currency used on the document.
Total qty. The total quantity on the receipt document.
Total amount The total amount of the receipt document.
Ref. no. The reference number specified for the purchase order.
Date The receipt date of the purchase order.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Create purchase orders (PO505000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000 page You use this window to create purchase orders for transfer and sales orders for which the Mark for purchase order check box was selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create purchase orders (PO505000) You use this window to create purchase orders for transfer and sales orders for which the Mark for purchase order check box was selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Also, you can create purchase orders for the remaining quantities (those not yet shipped) of items that were partially shipped for sales orders and for replenishment requests generated by using the prepare the [Prepare replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window. Generally, the generated purchase orders will include the requests for each replenishment warehouse for each supplier, no matter which demand warehouses were specified for the items to be ordered. You can view the generated purchase orders in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Creates purchase orders for the sales orders you have selected in the table.
Process all Creates purchase orders for all sales orders listed in the table.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window in a pop-up window to display the availability data of the stock item you selected in the table (by clicking the row).
## The top part In the top part, you can select the orders to be listed (and processed, if needed) by stock item, item class, item product manager, work group, or specific customer. Also, you can select the creation date for the purchase orders to be generated.
Element Description
Creation date The date when the purchase orders will be created. The purchase order will get its date from this field.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you use as follows to select the sales orders for the stock items that are assigned to a particular product manager:

  • Select the Me check box to view the orders for stock items assigned to you. The field will display your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another user to view the sales order for stock items assigned to another product manager.
  • Clear the check box and the field to view the sales orders for stock items assigned to all users of the selected work group (if one is specified) or all work groups (if no work group is specified).
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use in the following ways to view the sales orders for stock items assigned to a specific work group or a product manager in a group:

  • Select the My check box to view the orders for stock items assigned to your work group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another work group to display the orders for stock items assigned to all members of the group or to a particular user of the group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the orders for stock items assigned to all work groups.
Item class ID The item class of the stock items listed on the sales orders.
Item ID The particular stock item for which you want to generate purchase orders (based on the sales orders requesting the item).
Warehouse ID

The destination warehouse for the items to be purchased (as specified on replenishment orders or back orders).

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Supplier The supplier from which the items are to be purchased. Select a particular supplier to create orders for this supplier by grouping supplier items for the selected warehouse.
Requested on The delivery date of the order.
Customer The customer (by its customer number) that will receive the items, if applicable.
Order type

The type of purchase order to be created from the sales order. The following options are available:

Normal
A purchase order of the normal type
Drop-ship
A purchase order of the drop-ship type
Order no. The number of the sales, transfer, or replenishment order.
Show details When this check box is selected, you will see the Supplier price, Currency ID, Weight, and Volume columns in the table part.
Exclude lines without supplier When this check box is selected, item lines without supplier information will not be displayed in the table part. This is selected by default when you open the window.
Weight A read-only field that displays the total weight of items on the purchase orders to be created.
Volume A read-only field that displays the total volume of items on the purchase orders to be created.
## The table In this table, you can view the sales orders that meet the specified selection criteria and select the sales orders for which you want to create purchase orders. Please note that some of these columns are not visible, if you have not selected the **Show details** option above.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Plan type The description of the type of order.
Item ID The ID of the stock item to be purchased. Stock items are maintained in the Inventory workspace. To view or edit an stock item, use the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Item description The description of the stock item to be purchased.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the item will be purchased.

By default, this is the warehouse specified as the replenishment warehouse for the item when it is stocked at the demand warehouse (in the Item warehouse detail window).

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Warehouse description The description of the warehouse.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the stock item to be purchased.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item to be purchased.
Requested on The delivery date of the order.
Demand warehouse

The warehouse where the item was requested for the transfer order or for replenishment.

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Demand warehouse description

The description of the warehouse where the item was requested.

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Supplier The ID of the supplier from which the item will be purchased.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item will be purchased.
Location

The supplier location from which the item will be purchased.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Lead time (days)

The number of days required for any item to reach the company when they are shipped from this supplier.

This value is specified in the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window.

Shipment lead time (days) The shipment lead time, if it has been specified for the supplier or the carrier.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the supplier.
Ship via The carrier used to ship the ordered item.
Supplier price

The supplier’s price for the stock item to be ordered.

The supplier price for the stock items is specified in the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window.

Extended amount The extended amount for the line, which the system calculates as the price multiplied by the quantity of the item.
Currency ID The applicable currency.
Customer The ID of the customer for which the item are to be purchased.
Customer name The name of the customer for which the item are to be purchased.
Customer price The price specified in the original sales order.
Customer unit The unit of measure used as the sale unit on the sales order.
Order no. The reference number of the original order.
Weight The weight of the specified quantity of the item.
Volume The volume of the specified quantity of the item.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)
Purchase receipts (PO302000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000 page In this window, you can view the existing purchase and transfer receipts and returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipts (PO302000) In this window, you can view the existing purchase and transfer receipts and returns. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the existing purchase and transfer receipts and returns. You can also create a new purchase receipt or return based on a purchase order (or lines of purchase orders) and release the document. For more information, see: [About purchase receipt processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-purchase-receipt-processing-options/) ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Here, you specify summary information for a new purchase receipt or return, or select an existing receipt or return by its reference number. ### The buttons
Button Description
Allocations

Opens the Allocations dialog box, which you can use to allocate stock items by location, lot/serial number, and expiration date.

This button is available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Sales order to purchase order link, Multiple warehouse locations, or Lot and serial tracking.

Release Releases the purchase or transfer receipt or return, and changes its status to Released.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

  • Create purchase invoice To create a purchase invoice.
  • Email purchase receipt To email, according to the settings of the PURCHASE ORDER mailing, the receipt to the supplier specified in this receipt.
  • Recalculate prices and discounts To open the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you can use to specify the extent to which you want to refresh the prices and discounts for the document.

This action is not available for transfer receipts.

Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands:

View inventory document
To view the details of the inventory receipt generated for this receipt in the Receipts (IN301000) window.
View supplier ledger document
To view the supplier ledger document (invoice, credit adjustment, purchase credit note, or prepayment) in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window, which is automatically created on release of the purchase receipt due to the selection of the Create invoice check box.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands:

Print purchase receipt
To print the current purchase receipt by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.
View purchase receipt invoicing history
To view the invoicing details for the current purchase receipt by using the Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000) report.
Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered
To print the purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered by using the Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000) report.
Add transfer To add a transfer to a transfer receipt. This is available when the selected document type is Transfer receipt.
### The Recalculate prices and discounts dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used for updating prices (referred to in purchase orders as unit costs) and discounts for the purchase receipt.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. You can select one of the following options:

All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines
Current line
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line
Set current unit prices When this check box is selected, the system must replace the item prices with the current prices in the selected line or all lines.
Override manual prices

When this check box is selected, the system will replace the item prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit cost or Ext. cost column) with the current prices.

The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.

Recalculate discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will recalculate the discounts for the selected line or the all lines.

This check box is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Override manual line discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will cancel the manual discounts for the selected line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
### The elements
Element Description
Type

The type of the document, which can be one of the following:

Receipt
For a purchase receipt
Return
For a purchase return
Transfer receipt
For a transfer receipt
Receipt no. The unique reference number of the purchase receipt, transfer receipt, or return, which the system automatically assigns according to the number series specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window.
Status

The current status of the document, which the system assigns automatically. The following options are available:

On hold
The receipt document is a draft and you can edit it manually.
Balanced
The document is balanced and you can release it. You can modify or delete a document with Balanced, but you can save the changes only if the control total is equal to the new total amount.
Released
The document has been released and you cannot edit or delete it.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the document has the On hold status.

The check box is selected by default for a new receipt if the Hold receipts on entry option in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window is selected.

Date The date when the receipt document was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which transactions from the document should be posted.
Warehouse

The warehouse from which the items have been received for transfer orders.

This field is available for transfer receipts.

Supplier

The supplier from which the items have been received or to which they will be returned.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.

Location

The supplier location from which the items should be received or to which they should be returned.

This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.

Currency

The currency the supplier uses for invoicing./p>

This field is not available for transfer receipts.

View base/View currency When you click View base in the Currency column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency, if the currency of the document is other than your base currency. Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Create invoice

When this check box is selected, the system will create an appropriate invoice (or adjustment) automatically when the purchase receipt is released.

This check box gets its default value from the Create invoice check box in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window.

Supplier ref.

The reference number of the supplier document this receipt or return is based on.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.

Total qty. The total quantity of items received from or returned to the supplier. The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of all quantities of all stock items listed in the Document details tab of this window.
Control qty.

The total quantity of goods on the receipt or return

You must enter this value if the Validate totals on entry check box in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window is selected for receipts. If the check box is not selected, the field is not available.

VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the tax with the Include in VAT exempt totalcheck box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.

This field is not displayed for transfer receipts and is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will only be displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable tax in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable totalfield of the document.

This field is not available for transfer receipts and is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is only displayed if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Total amount

The total amount calculated for items received from or returned to the supplier. The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of all amounts of all stock items listed on the Document details tab of this window.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.

Control amount

The total amount of the receipt or return, which you manually enter. The system validates that the entered amount equals the total amount, which it calculates automatically. If the values are not equal, the system generates a warning message, and you can save the document only with the On hold status.

This field is only displayed if the Validate totals on entry option in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window is selected.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.

## The Document details tab This tab provides detailed information about the items that have been received or are being returned. You can provide these details by adding existing purchase orders or lines from them, thus avoiding typing the same information twice. When you select a line in the table, more information about the availability for the line item is displayed in the table footer. See the table footer description below for more information. ### The buttons
Button Description
Add line Opens the Add receipt line dialog box, where you can enter a new line for the receipt. You can use this dialog box to efficiently enter information about received items by using a barcode scanner.
Add purchase order

Opens the Add purchase order dialog box, where you can select a purchase order and include it in the current receipt or return.

This button is not available for transfer receipts.

Add purchase order line

Opens the Add purchase order line dialog box, which you can use to select lines from an existing purchase order and add the lines to this receipt or return.

This button is not available for transfer receipts.

View purchase order

Navigates to the Purchase orders (PO301000) window where you can view the details of the purchase order. This option is available only for lines based on purchase orders or purchase order lines.

This button is not available for transfer receipts.

Add transfer

Opens the Add transfer order dialog box, where you can select a transfer order and include it in the current receipt.

This button is only available for transfer receipts.

### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, lot or serial numbers, or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant, or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. This dialog box is only available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window: **Sales order to purchase orders link**, **Multiple warehouse locations**, or **Lot serial tracking**.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no location specified or lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers will be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Generate

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number assigned to specific quantity of stock item.

This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Item ID The ID of the stock item on the line.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

OK (button) Saves the records generated.
### The table columns
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the received item.
Line type

The type of the purchase receipt line. You cannot change the value in this column if it comes from a purchase order or a purchase order line added to the purchase receipt. The available options are the following:

Goods for warehouse
An item ordered for warehouse. This line type is shown for all stock items for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Non-stock
A non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Service
A stock or non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is cleared in the Stock items (IN202500) or the Non-stock items (IN202000) window, respectively.
Freight
An applicable freight amount.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item has been received.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Location

The location where the item has been received. If a project or project task is specified for this document line, only locations assigned to this project or project task are available for selection. SPLIT is displayed if multiple locations are assigned to the received quantity of the item.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Transaction descr. The description of the receipt or return transaction.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the purchased or transferred item. By default, it is the purchase unit.
Ordered qty. The quantity of the purchased item (in the specified UoM).
Open qty. The quantity of the purchased item (in the specified UoM) that has not been received yet.
Receipt qty. The quantity of the item in the specified UoM that has been received (listed on released receipts).
Base receipt qty. The quantity of the item received, expressed in the base unit of measure.
Unit cost

The cost of a unit of the purchased item.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Cost

The extended cost of the item, which is the unit price multiplied by the quantity. You can manually enter the amount that is not based on the unit cost and the available discounts.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Discount percent

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the percent of the discount that has been entered manually or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item.

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

Discount amount

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the amount of the discount that has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually.

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.

Manual discount

When this check box is selected, discount has been applied manually.

You can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount or you can select a discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application. This check box will be automatically selected if you enter the cost not based on the specified unit cost.

Discount code

The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line automatically.

This column appears only if the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount series

The ID of a discount series that has been applied to this line.

This column appears only if the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Disc. unit cost The cost of the item per unit, once the discount has been applied.
Amount

The amount calculated (after discount has been taken) for the item.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

VAT category

The VAT category assigned to the stock item.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Account

The account used to record the item amount on the purchase receipt; used for non-stock items for which receipt is not required (by default, it is the account specified for the item in the Use COGS/expense account from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

If this purchase receipt is created for return of such non-stock item, this account is associated with the default reason code for returns (specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window) but you can override it.

Description The description of this account.
Accrual account

The accrual account to record the item amount on the purchase receipt; used for stock items and non-stock items for which a receipt is required.

If this purchase receipt is created for a return, this account is empty.

Accrual sub.

The subaccount used to record the item amount on the purchase receipt, used for stock items and non-stock items for which a receipt is required.

If this purchase receipt is created for a return, this subaccount is empty.

Sub. ID

The subaccount to be used to record the non-stock item amount on the purchase receipt (for non-stock items for which receipts are not required).

By default, it is the subaccount generated in accordance with the rule defined in the Use COGS/expense account from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

If this purchase receipt is created for a return of such non-stock item, this subaccount is associated with the default reason code for returns (specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window) but you can override it.

Project

The project with which the document is associated. If the document is based on a purchase order, the project is automatically copied from the respective purchase order line.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Project task

The project task with which the document is associated.

If the document is based on a purchase order, the project task is automatically copied from the respective purchase order line. For the receipt line with a stock item, you can select this project task only if the specified warehouse has a warehouse location assigned to this project task.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Expiration date

The expiration date of the received item.

This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number assigned to the received quantity of the purchased item; SPLIT is displayed if multiple lot or serial numbers are assigned to the received quantity.

If the receipt is created for a drop-ship order, you have to enter a lot or serial number only if the Required for drop shipments check box is selected for the item’s lot or serial class in the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window.

This column is only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Purchase order type

The type of the purchase order related to this purchase receipt.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Purchase order no.

The reference number of the purchase order related to this purchase receipt.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Purchase order line no.

The line number of the purchase order related to this line of the purchase receipt.

This column does not appear for transfer receipts.

Transfer order type

The type of the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Transfer order no.

The reference number of the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Transfer line no.

The line number in the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Transfer shipment no.

The shipment number in the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Complete purchase order line

When this check box is selected, the purchase order line added to this receipt line will be considered completed upon release of this purchase receipt.

You use this check box to override the purchase order line completion requirements (the Min. receipt, Max. receipt, and Complete on values) set for the order in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.

Open purchase order line

When this check box is selected, the appropriate line of the purchase order linked to this return line will be opened:

The quantity in the Qty. on receipts column for the purchase order line will be decreased by the quantity on this return line.

This column appears for purchase receipts of the Return type only.

Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
CN code The CN code stands for Combined Nomenclature, and is a tool for classifying goods in the EU. It is a number to designate the transaction.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID used for this stock item by the supplier. The system inserts the Alt. item ID value (if any) defined for the specified supplier in a line of the Supplier part number type on the Cross-reference tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Supplementary measure unit A supplementary measure unit quantity (taken from the sales/purchase unit, or from the Net weight field).
Country of origin The Intrastat code (CH, DK, SE, etc.) for the country where the product was produced.
Net weight An Intrastat measure of unit. Usually the unit is the weight in kilograms. This unit is a code that you set in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
### The table footer When you select a line, more information about the line item is displayed in the table footer.
Element Description
On hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the specified location.
Available The quantity available of the item at the specified location, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
Available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected location.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

### The Add receipt line dialog box Here you can add a line specifying that a stock item has been received at the warehouse, and you can effectively add items to the receipt by scanning their barcodes. To accomplish this, make sure the **Add line automatically** option is selected. Once the item barcode is scanned, the system finds the item record and fills in the dialog box elements by using the item default values with the quantity as specified on a matching purchase order or by one unit per barcode. You can select the **Add one unit per barcode** option to increase the item quantity by one unit each time you scan the barcode.
Element Description
Barcode An optional field that contains the barcode of the item.
Item ID The ID of the item.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the item.
Warehouse

The warehouse to receive the item.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Location

The location to receive the item.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Expiration date The expiration date for the specified quantity of the item.
Receipt qty. The quantity of the item received, in the specified unit of measure.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item. For items requiring serial or lot numbers, this is the base unit; for other items it is the purchase unit.
Supplier The supplier from which the item was received.
Supplier location

The supplier location from which the item was received.

This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Order type The type of the purchase order with the selected item listed.
Order no. The number of the purchase order that has the selected item listed.
Line no. The order number of the document line.
Unit cost The unit cost of the stock item.
Amount The amount for the line, calculated as the unit cost multiplied by the receipt quantity.
Add one unit per barcode When this check box is selected, the item’s quantity is increased by one unit each time the item’s barcode is scanned or entered manually.
Add line automatically

When this check box is selected, a new receipt line will be added automatically for each barcode scanned for the first time.

If the barcode has been scanned before (for this receipt), the item quantity will be increased accordingly.

Add line (button) Adds the entered data as a line to the receipt if the Add line automatically option was not selected.
Add and close (button) Adds the entered data as a line to the receipt and closes the dialog box.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the receipt.
### The Add purchase order dialog box You use this dialog box to add an existing purchase order of the selected supplier to the current purchase receipt or return. Only purchase orders of **Normal** or **Drop-ship** types can be added.
Element Description
Type The type of purchase orders to be shown in the table.
Show purchase orders in all currencies When this check box is selected, orders in all currencies are displayed.
Type The type of the purchase order.
Order no. The number of the purchase order.
Date The date when the purchase order was created.
Status The status of the purchase order.
Currency The currency used on the purchase order.
Order total The total amount of the purchase order.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference number entered for the purchase order.
Terms The payment terms of the purchase order.
Description The description entered for the purchase order.
Open qty. The quantity of the stock item yet to be received on the purchase order.
Open amt. The corresponding amount for the item quantity yet to be received.
Qty. on receipt The quantity that has been received.
Received amount The amount that has been received.
Add purchase order (button) Adds the lines from the included purchase orders to the purchase receipt or return.
Add and close (button) Adds the lines from the included purchase orders to the receipt or return and closes the dialog box.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box without making additions to the receipt or return.
### The Add purchase order line dialog box You use this dialog box to add a line or multiple lines from an existing purchase order of the selected supplier to the current purchase receipt or return, to account for items received. You can add lines from only purchase orders with **Normal** or **Drop-ship** types.
Element Description
Type The type of purchase orders whose lines you want to view: Normal or Drop-ship.
Order no. The number of the particular purchase order from which you want to add a line. Select an order number if you want to view lines from only a particular order.
Order no. The number of the particular purchase order this line is from.
Line type The type of the purchase order line.
Line no. The order number of the document line.
Item ID The item ID of the item from the purchase order line.
Supplier The supplier from which the item is received.
UoM The unit of measure used for the stock item from the purchase order line.
Qty. on receipt The quantity that has been received.
Order qty. The quantity of the stock item (measured in the specified UoMs) from the purchase order line.
Open qty. The open quantity (not yet shipped) of the item on the purchase order line.
Line description The description of the purchase order line.
Promised date The date when the supplier promised that the items listed in the order will be received at their destination location.
Min. receipt (%) The minimum percent of the quantity on the order that may be received.
Max. receipt (%) The maximum percent of the quantity on the order that may be received.
Receipt action The action to be performed on receipt of the stock item if the received quantity is greater than the max. receipt value or less than the min. receipt value.
Add purchase order line (button) Adds the selected line or lines to the receipt or return.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected line or lines to the receipt or return and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding any selected lines to the receipt or return.
### The Add transfer order dialog box You use this dialog box to add one or multiple transfer orders to the current transfer receipt. Although by using this dialog you add the selected transfer orders with all their lines, you can delete from the **Details** table the lines for which the items are not yet received. You cannot change the item quantities for any added line.
Element Description
From warehouse The warehouse where the transfer originated. Select a warehouse to filter existing transfer orders by the warehouse of origin or leave the field blank to view transfers from all warehouses.
Order type The type of the order.
Order no. The number of the transfer order.
Shipment no. The number of the shipment order.
From warehouse The warehouse where the transfer originated.
To warehouse The warehouse to which transfer has been made (the warehouse that you selected in the Warehouse field in the top part ).
Date The date when the transfer order was created.
Description The description entered for the transfer order.
Add and close (button) Adds the included transfer orders to the transfer receipt and closes the dialog box.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box without making additions to the transfer receipt.
## The VAT details tab This tab contains detailed information related to the VAT to be paid for the received items. When you save the purchase receipt, its total amount is updated and the applicable VAT with its details are displayed on this tab. If the VAT that applies to the receipt is of the **VAT** (value-added VAT) type paid to the supplier but claimable from the tax agency if the items are purchased for production or further resale, and the prices are gross prices (that is, they include the VAT), the system calculates the amounts of VAT and records them to appropriate VAT accounts. Details about VAT and their amounts are displayed on the **VAT details** tab. This tab is not available for transfer receipts.
Column Description
VAT ID The specific VAT that has been applied to any of the items listed in the purchase receipt.
VAT rate The VAT rate used.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for this VAT.
VAT amount The amount of VAT.
## The Invoicing details tab This tab provides information about invoicing settings, total amounts, and the work group to which this purchase receipt is assigned. ### The Invoicing settings section You use these settings to add, view, and change the information used to create an invoice from the supplier. If the **Create invoice** check box (in the top part) is selected for the purchase receipt, the system automatically generates a new invoice in the Supplier ledger workspace, which you can view in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. The default values for these elements are defined in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window.
Element Description
Branch The branch involved in invoicing the supplier.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the supplier.
Purchase invoice date The date of the invoice generated for the receipt.
Due date The due date of the invoice.
Cash disc. date The date until which the cash discount from the supplier is available for the invoice.
Cash discount The cash discount amount.
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier.
### The Totals section Here you can view totals for this purchase receipt. These values are calculated and updated automatically as you enter and release invoices that may include separate lines of this receipt. You can enter and view the invoices by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window.
Element Description
Balance not yet invoiced The purchase receipt amount not yet invoiced.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of items on this receipt that is not yet invoiced.
Line total not yet invoiced The line amount that is not yet invoiced.
VAT total not yet invoiced The VAT amount on the purchase receipt that is not yet invoiced.
### The Assign to section Here you can view the work group to which the purchase receipt is assigned and the employee who owns it.
Element Description
Work group The work group to which the purchase receipt is assigned.
Owner The owner of this purchase receipt.
## The Landed costs tab This tab has a table with detailed information about the landed costs incurred for the stock items listed on this purchase or transfer receipt. For transfer receipts, this tab is available only if the transfer is performed between different warehouses (not between different locations within the same warehouse). ### The buttons
Button Description
View supplier document Navigates to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can view the supplier document related to the landed cost.
View inventory document Navigates to the Adjustments (IN303000) window where you can view the adjustment generated for the landed cost.
### The columns
Column Description
Landed cost code The landed cost code associated with the landed costs incurred for this purchase or transfer receipt. The codes are defined in the Landed cost codes ( PO202000) window.
Description The description of the landed cost code.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the original invoice from the landed cost supplier. This value will appear in the Supplier ref. field in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window for a landed cost invoice generated for this receipt. The value is mandatory if the Require supplier reference check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. If the supplier of the goods is also the landed cost supplier, make sure that the value specified in the Supplier ref. column on this tab differs from the value in the Supplier ref. field in the top part of this window, because an invoice for landed costs is always generated separately from an invoice for the received goods.
Supplier The landed cost supplier to whom the landed cost amount will be paid; select from the list of suppliers that have the Landed cost supplier check box selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Location

The location of the selected landed cost supplier.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Supplier document type The type of the supplier document related to the landed cost.
Purchase receipt type The type of the purchase receipt related to the landed cost.
Purchase invoice date The date of the purchase invoice for the landed cost.
Currency The currency used for the landed cost.
Amount A non-zero amount of the landed cost.
VAT code The VAT code applicable to the landed cost of the type. By default, it’s the VAT category associated with supplier’s VAT zone.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the landed cost supplier.
Line no. The order number of the line.
Item ID The item ID of the stock item to which the specified amount of the landed costs associated with this code is allocated according to the allocation method defined for this landed cost code.
Supplier document type The type of the supplier document generated for the landed cost.
Ref. no. suppliers The reference number of the supplier document generated for the landed cost. Click the link to open the document in a pop-up window.
Inventory doc. type The type of the document generated in the Inventory workspace for this landed cost.
Inventory ref. no. The reference number of the document generated in the Inventory workspace for this landed cost. Click the link to open the document in a pop-up dialog box.
Landed cost trans. ID The ID of the landed cost transaction connected with this landed cost.
Postpone creation of purchase invoice

When this check box is selected, a related supplier ledger invoice will be created later for the incurred landed costs. On release of this receipt only an inventory adjustment (that will update the item costs) will be generated.

When the supplier’s invoice for the landed costs is actually received, you can create an invoice for the landed costs in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window and include this receipt by clicking the Add postponed landed costs action on the toolbar.

## The Discount details tab This tab shows the details of the supplier discounts that were applied to the document. This tab is only available if the **Supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount When this check box is selected, a Group and Document level discount will be cancelled for the document. Selecting the check box updates the document’s total and the line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the table.
Discount code The discount code of the supplier discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount applied to the document.
Manual discount When this check box is selected, the supplier discount shown in this row has been applied manually from the Group or Document level discounts marked as manual in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window.
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the item quantity.
Discount amount The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item.
## The Intrastat tab
Element Description
Transaction type The type of the Intrastat transaction, according to the Intrastat rules.
Mode of transportation

Here you can select the manner in which you like the order to be shipped.

  1. Unknown

  2. Transport by sea

  3. Transport by rail

  4. Transport by road

  5. Transport by aeroplane

  6. Consignments by posts

  7. Fixed transport installations

  8. Transport by inland waterway

Container When this check box is selected, the order will be shipped in a container.
Release purchase receipts (PO501000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-purchase-receipts-po501000 page You can use this window to view and release selected purchase receipt or return documents with the Balanced status. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release purchase receipts (PO501000) You can use this window to view and release selected purchase receipt or return documents with the Balanced status. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view and release selected purchase receipt or return documents with the **Balanced** status. The list of documents displayed in this window includes the purchase receipts or returns that were created in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Releases the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Releases all the documents listed in the table.
## The table In this table, you can view the list of the purchase receipts generated according to the purchase orders, as well as return documents. You can select the documents to be released or release all the listed documents.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Receipt no. The number of the purchase receipt or return document. Click the link to navigate to the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window to view the details of the selected document.
Type The type of the document, which can be Receipt or Return.
Supplier The supplier (by its ID) from which the goods are received or to which they are returned.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Location

The supplier location from which the goods are received or to which they are returned.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Date The date when the document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Total amount The total amount of the document.
Work group The work group to which the document owner belongs.
Owner The owner of the document.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)
Print/email purchase orders (PO503000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/print-email-purchase-orders-po503000 page In this window, you can print the selected purchase orders with the Balanced status or send them by email. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/email purchase orders (PO503000) In this window, you can print the selected purchase orders with the Balanced status or send them by email. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can print the selected purchase orders with the **Balanced** status or send them by email. Also, you can apply the **Mark as do not email** action to selected orders to ensure that they are not sent by email. This causes the **Do not email**check box in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window to be selected for the particular orders. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes all documents listed in the table.
## The top part In the top part area, you can select (by owner or work group or both) the documents to be displayed in the table. You also select the action to be applied to the documents you process.
Element Description
Action

The action to be performed on the selected purchase orders if the Process or Process allaction is invoked:

Email purchase order
Generates emails for the purchase orders in accordance with the mailing settings
Mark as: do not email
Marks the purchase orders as not requiring emailing
Print purchase order
Prints purchase orders that are ready for printing
Assigned to

A field and the Me check box, which in the following ways to select the employee to whom the purchase orders to be displayed are assigned:

  • Select the Me check box to display the purchase orders assigned to you. The field will display your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another user to view the purchase orders assigned to the user.
  • Leave the elements blank to view the purchase orders of all users of the selected work group (if one is specified) or all work groups (if no work group is specified).
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use in the following ways to select the work group the purchase orders to be displayed are assigned to:

  • Select the My check box to view the purchase orders assigned to your work group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another work group to display the purchase orders assigned to everyone in the group or to a particular user of the group.
  • Leave the elements blank to view the purchase orders assigned to all work groups.
## The table In this table, you can view the list of purchase orders with the **Balanced** status that match any selection criteria you have specified. You can also select the documents to be processed or those to be printed, emailed, or marked as not intended for emailing, depending on the action you have selected.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Date The date when the purchase order was created.
Order no. The purchase order number. Navigates to the Purchase orders (PO301000) window where you can view the details of the selected purchase order.
Status The current status of the purchase order.
Owner The employee ID of the owner of the purchase order.
Employee name The name of the employee who is the owner of the purchase order.
Description Any description that has been provided for the purchase order.
Approver The employee ID of the person who approved the purchase order.
Currency The currency used in the purchase order.
Control total The manually entered total amount of the purchase order document.
Supplier The supplier associated with the order.
Supplier name The name of the supplier associated with the order.
Supplier class The class of suppliers to which this supplier is assigned.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)
Purchase history by item (PO40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-history-by-item-po40101s page You use this inquiry to list all the purchases by item, based on purchase order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase history by item (PO40101S) You use this inquiry to list all the purchases by item, based on purchase order lines. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID The particular item you want to view the purchase history for.
Item class The particular item class you want to view the purchase history for. You can only select from stock item classes.
Subaccount The subaccount you want to view the purchase history for.
Supplier The supplier you want to view the purchase history for.
Supplier class The supplier class you want to view the purchase history for.
From period The first period for the list.
To period The last period for the list.
Start date The start date of the date range.
End date The end date of the date range. Only purchase orders having dates falling within the specified interval will be included in the list.
Include not completed lines When this check box is selected, the data from not completed lines will be included.
## The table
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the item that has been purchased. To view or edit the item, use the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Description The description of the item.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item has been purchased.
Order qty. The quantity of items ordered.
Qty. on receipt The quantity of the item that has been received.
Amount The total amount for the item (after the deduction of discounts).
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)
Purchase order list (PO40100S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-list-po40100s page In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new purchase orders, and add lines to purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order list (PO40100S) In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new purchase orders, and add lines to purchase orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new purchase orders, and add lines to purchase orders. You can create a purchase order based on an existing sales order or by adding separate lines of different sales orders. Once an order has been saved, it can be approved, rejected, or cancelled by any of the employees assigned to review this purchase order. ## The top part
Button Description
View purchase order Click this to view the purchase order selected in the table in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window that pops up.
Element Description
Type

The type of the purchase order, all or one of the following:

Normal
A purchase order for products and services that are purchased on invoice or paid in cash. This is the most common type of purchase orders.
Drop-ship
A purchase order for goods that are delivered directly from the supplier to the customer. The list of items and the shipping instructions are copied automatically from drop-ship sales orders to the drop-ship purchase order. This option is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Blanket
A purchase order for a large stock quantity that exceeds the quantity that is currently needed. This order reserves a certain quantity of supplier inventory for future purchasing. Blanket orders may be used to purchase products that are rarely available from suppliers or that have special discounts for high volumes. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default
A purchase order that includes the products purchased regularly in the same quantities from a specific supplier and that can be processed repeatedly. Orders of this type are used when the demand for ordered products is predictable and does not change over time. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Status

The system-generated status of the purchase order, all or one of the following options:

On hold
The purchase order is a draft and you can edit it manually.
Pending approval
The purchase order has not been approved by all the assigned persons.
Rejected
The order has been rejected by one of the persons assigned to approve it.
Open
The order was processed in accordance with the settings in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window but has not been completed yet.
Pending printing
Printing is required for the document, but has not been done yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Print order option is selected for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Pending email
Emailing is required for thes document, but it has not been done yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Email order option in the Suppliers (AP303000) is selected for the supplier.
Cancelled
The order has been cancelled through the Cancel order action (on the Actions menu of the toolbar). An order with this status cannot be edited, and purchase receipts cannot be based on it.
Closed
All of the goods on the order have been received.
Printed
The purchase order has been printed.
Supplier The supplier from which the items will be purchased. For transfer requests, it is a branch of your organisation.
## The table
Column Description
Order no. The number of the sales order.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Date The date when the added purchase order was created.
Delivery date The date when the order was delivered.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference number specified for the purchase order.
Type The type of the order.
Status The current status of the order.
Currency The currency of the purchase order.
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the order’s supplier.
Discount total The total discount amount of the order.
VAT total The total VAT amount of the order.
Order total The total amount of the order.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Landed cost codes (PO202000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000 page In this window, you can define the landed cost codes that are used in your system for specifying the additional costs incurred for delivering purchased goods to your company warehouses or to customer locations if the goods are drop-shipped. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Landed cost codes (PO202000) In this window, you can define the landed cost codes that are used in your system for specifying the additional costs incurred for delivering purchased goods to your company warehouses or to customer locations if the goods are drop-shipped. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define the landed cost codes that are used in your system for specifying the additional costs incurred for delivering purchased goods to your company warehouses or to customer locations if the goods are drop-shipped. For more information, see: [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). For each code, you should assign a specific supplier and the account and subaccount that will accrue landed costs of the type. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In the top part, you can specify a new code and its settings, or select an existing code to view or modify its settings.
Element Description
Landed cost code The unique ID of the landed cost. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the landed cost.
Type

The type of the landed cost, which identifies its source. The following options are available:

  • Freight and misc. origin charge The landed cost is associated with freight expenses and other origin-related charges.
  • Customs duties The landed cost is associated with customs duties paid for the purchased goods.
  • VAT The landed cost is associated with VAT.

This option is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

  • Misc. destination charges The landed cost is associated with miscellaneous destination charges.
  • Other The landed cost is of another type.
Application method The method of applying the landed cost with this code. The landed costs can be specified on an invoice or adjustment in the Supplier ledger workspace, on a purchase receipt in the Purchases workspace, or on both types of documents. Select one of the following options: From supplier, From purchase order, or From both.
Allocation method

The method of allocating the landed costs to the purchased goods. The allocation method defines how the landed cost amount is distributed among the purchased stock items. Select one of the following options:

By quantity
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the quantities of different goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased stock item is the portion of this item’s quantity in the total quantity of all items purchased. If units other than base units of measure (UoMs) are specified for items, item quantities are calculated with respect to the base UoMs. Use this option only for purchase orders that include similar items with the same base UoM or similar base UoMs. Do not use this option for purchase orders that include disparate items with base units that cannot be compared, such as pallets and tons or meters and pounds.
By cost
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the costs of purchased goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased item is the portion of this item’s cost in the total cost of all different items purchased.
By weight
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the weights of purchased goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased item is the portion of this item’s weight in the total weight of all items purchased.
By volume
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the volumes of purchased goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased item is the portion of this item’s volume in the total volume of all items purchased.
None
The landed costs are not allocated to item costs; only a purchase invoice will be created for the landed cost.
Supplier The supplier with whom this landed cost is associated; not necessarily the supplier of the goods. You can only select suppliers who have the Landed cost supplier check box selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Location

The supplier location with which the landed cost is associated.

This field appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Terms The payment terms for this landed cost. Payment terms are defined in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Reason code The reason code to be used by default for cost adjustment transactions generated for the purchased goods.
Landed cost accrual account The account used for accumulating the landed costs before applying them to make cost adjustments for the purchased goods.
Landed cost accrual sub. The associated subaccount used for accumulating the landed costs before applying them to make cost adjustments for the purchased goods.
VAT category The VAT category to be used for the landed costs with this code.
Landed cost variance account The landed cost variance account (expense) to be used to record any differences between the landed costs specified on the purchase receipts and inventory receipts.
Landed cost variance sub. The corresponding landed cost variance subaccount.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)
Release landed costs from receipts (PO506000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-landed-costs-from-receipts-po506000 page In this window, you can view and manually process the landed costs associated with purchase and transfer receipts, if the landed costs were not processed automatically. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release landed costs from receipts (PO506000) In this window, you can view and manually process the landed costs associated with purchase and transfer receipts, if the landed costs were not processed automatically. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view and manually process the landed costs associated with purchase and transfer receipts, if the landed costs were not processed automatically. For details, see: [About landed cost application scenarios.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the landed costs for the items you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes the landed costs for all items listed in the table.
## The table In this table, you can select the documents for which the landed costs will be processed.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Type The type of the document.
Receipt no. The reference number of the purchase or transfer receipt for which the landed costs should be processed. Click the link to navigate to the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window to view the details of the selected receipt.
Supplier The supplier (landed cost supplier) who provided the transportation services.
Location

The supplier location associated with the landed cost.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Date The date of the purchase or transfer receipt.
Currency The currency of the purchase or transfer receipt.
Receipt total amt. The total amount of the purchase or transfer receipt.
Landed cost total (base currency) The total amount of landed costs for the purchase or transfer receipt. This amount is specified in the base currency.
Landed cost records The number of landed cost records on the receipt.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)
Supplier inventory (PO201000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000 page In this window, you can maintain supplier inventory catalogues or lists of items purchased from a particular supplier location and their prices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier inventory (PO201000) In this window, you can maintain supplier inventory catalogues or lists of items purchased from a particular supplier location and their prices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can maintain supplier inventory catalogues or lists of items purchased from a particular supplier location and their prices. The system uses this information when you create purchase orders. For more information, see: [About supplier catalogues.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-supplier-catalogues/) ## The top part Here you can select a supplier and supplier location; the table below then displays items you have purchased from the supplier.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose inventory catalog will be displayed. Select a supplier from the list of suppliers available in the system, which have been created in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Location

The supplier location from which the items to be displayed are purchased. By default, the main location of the selected supplier will appear here, but you can select another location. Supplier locations are defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Warehouse The default warehouse (in your company) that will receive the goods from the supplier location. This warehouse is specified for each supplier location in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.
Lead time (days)

Read-only.

This field shows the lead time for the selected supplier location. This lead time is defined in the Shipping instructions section on the General information tab of the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

Currency The default currency used for transactions with this supplier. This currency is defined in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
## The table In this table, you can view or edit the list of items purchased from the supplier at the selected supplier location, items that might be purchased in the future and items that have already been purchased or items for which this supplier is specified on the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. For each listed item, you can specify the alternative ID used for the item by the supplier, and other supplier-specific information. The last column displays the supplier price (per a purchase UoM) used last for this item on a document of a specific type. There can be multiple lines for the same item if it is purchased in different UoMs. To view all suppliers' prices for the item, click **Supplier prices** on the table toolbar.
Button Description
Supplier prices Navigates to the Supplier prices (AP202000) window where you can view available information about the prices that are used by the supplier (selected in the Supplier field) for the item selected in the table.
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, this item purchased from this supplier is active.
Default When this check box is selected, the selected supplier is the default supplier for this item.
All locations

When this check box is selected, the specified item’s purchasing information is the same for all locations.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Item ID The ID of the item, as used by your company.
Description The description specified for the item.
Purchase unit The unit of measure in which the item is was purchased from the supplier.
Supplier item ID The alternative ID used by the supplier as its item ID for the item.
Shipment lead time (days)

The additional lead time for the selected item, which represents the additional time required by the supplier to produce, assemble, and dispatch the item.

This value is added to the supplier Lead time value, defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window, to calculate the resulting lead time required to deliver the purchased item from the supplier’s location to your company’s warehouse.

Override A read-only check box that (if selected) indicates that value in the Shipment lead time (days) can be overridden.
Min. order freq. (days) The minimum frequency at which the item may be purchased from this supplier location.
Min. order qty. The minimum quantity of the item the supplier (at this location) requires for an order being placed.
Max. order qty. The maximum quantity of the item the supplier (at this location) allows for an order being placed.
Lot size

The lot size of the item when purchased from this supplier location.

If the lot size is not zero, the quantity on a purchase order is rounded up to match one or multiple lots. No fractions of a lot are allowed.

EOQ

The economic order quantity for the item when purchased from this supplier location.

This value represents the quantity of the item on an order that minimises the item’s holding and ordering costs.

Currency ID The currency in which the last price was specified.
Last supplier price The supplier price last used for the specified purchase UoM of the item.
Purchases reports /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases reports Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Purchase reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview page With the wide variety of reports for the Purchases workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about the purchase orders, purchase receipts, and returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase reports - overview With the wide variety of reports for the Purchases workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about the purchase orders, purchase receipts, and returns. You can also analyse the data by various criteria and track the purchase of goods at different warehouses and locations. Because the Purchases workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, such as Supplier ledger, Sales orders, General ledger, and VAT, you can find and analyse the precise information you need. Flexible selection options and data links allow you to easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. Because the purchase orders reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## Purchases reports The Purchases workspace includes the following reports: ### Audit + [Purchase order details by account (PO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000/): Displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. + [Purchase order details by stock item (PO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-item-po611500/): Displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. + [Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-supplier-po611000/): Displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. + [Purchase order summary (PO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-summary-po610500/): Shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. + [Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-details-po631000/): Displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. + [Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po630500/): Displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. + [Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-allocated-and-back-ordered-po622000/): Displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. + [Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-details-po632000/): Displays, for the selected financial period, summary information about the invoiced quantities and invoiced amounts for the released purchase receipts and information about adjustments made for returns. + [Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-summary-po631500/): Displays summary information about the invoices linked to the purchase receipts and the adjustments linked to returns. + [Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-details-by-supplier-po621000/): Displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. + [Purchase receipt history (PO643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-history-po643000/) + [Purchase receipt summary (PO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-summary-po620500/): Displays the summary information about the purchase receipts. ### Window + [Purchase receipt (PO646000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000/) + [Purchase order (PO641000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-po641000/) + [Purchase order, right address (PO64108S)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-right-address-po64108s/) Purchase order (PO641000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-po641000 section By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order (PO641000) By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. You can select a certain type of purchase order you want to view, or select an order number to view a particular purchase order. The selected purchase orders are displayed as they will be printed. Report lines that have the same item ID, line description, unit of measure, and unit price are aggregated. If multiple purchase orders are selected for the report, each order is displayed on a separate page. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type

The type of purchase orders you want to view in the report.

You can select one of the types ( Normal, Drop-ship, Blanket, or Default ) to limit the purchase orders to only those of the selected type.

The Blanketoption is only available if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in your system.

Order no. The number of the order to be displayed. Select an order number to display only this order, or leave the field blank if you want to view all purchase orders of the selected type.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase order details by account (PO612000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000 section This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order details by account (PO612000) This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. The data in the report is grouped by general ledger accounts and subaccounts specified for non-stock items in the purchase order lines (in the **Account** and **Sub.** columns, respectively). The report includes purchase orders with any statuse except for **Closed** and **Cancelled**. The report specifies the total open balance for each account and for all listed purchase order lines. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. Or you can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
Include unreleased receipts When this check box is selected, the data from unreleased purchase receipts should be taken into account when the Open qty. value is calculated for each purchase order included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase order details by item (PO611500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-item-po611500 section This report displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order details by item (PO611500) This report displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in the report is grouped by item. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. You can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
Include unreleased receipts When this check box is selected, the data from unreleased purchase receipts should be taken into account when the Open qty. value is calculated for each purchase order included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-supplier-po611000 section This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000) This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in the report is grouped by the suppliers for which the purchase orders were created. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. You can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
Include unreleased receipts When this check box is selected, the data from unreleased purchase receipts should be taken into account when the Open qty. value is calculated for each purchase order included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase order summary (PO610500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-summary-po610500 section This report shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order summary (PO610500) This report shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The information presented for each purchase order includes the type, reference number, order date, status, currency, supplier number and name, ordered quantity, open quantity, line total, and open amount. It also includes total values (for all purchase orders included in the report) for ordered quantity, open quantity, line total, and open amount. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. Or you can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Purchase reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase order, right address (PO64108S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-right-address-po64108s section By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order, right address (PO64108S) By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. You can select a certain type of purchase order you want to view, or select an order number to view a particular purchase order. The selected purchase orders are displayed as they will be printed, with the address on the right side. Report lines that have the same item ID, line description, unit of measure, and unit price are aggregated. If you select multiple purchase orders for the report, each order is displayed on a separate page. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type

The type of purchase orders you want to include in the report.

You can select an order type ( Normal, Drop-ship, Blanket, or Standard ) to limit the purchase orders to only those of the selected type.

The Blanketoption is only available if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in your system.

Order number The number of the order to be displayed. Select an order number to display only this order, or leave the field blank if you want to view all purchase orders of the selected type.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt (PO646000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000 section By using this report, you can view, print, and email the purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt (PO646000) By using this report, you can view, print, and email the purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can view, print, and email the purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace. You can select a certain type of purchase receipt to examine, or select a receipt number to view a particular purchase receipt. The selected purchase receipts are displayed as they will be printed. If multiple purchase receipts are selected for the report, each receipt is displayed on a separate page. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Type

The type of purchase receipts you want to view in the report.

You can select one of the available types to limit the purchase receipts to only those of the selected type.

Receipt no. The number of the receipt to be displayed. You can select a number to display only that receipt, or leave the field blank if you want to view all receipts of the type.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-details-po631000 section This report displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000) This report displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. The data in the report is grouped by the account and subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value, and the details on each purchased item are displayed. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Account ID The account used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify an account or leave the field blank to view data for all accounts.
Subaccount The subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify a subaccount or leave the field blank to view data for all subaccounts.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.

Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.

To period You can simulate accrual details on purchase order receipts by the To period option. When earlier periods are chosen as this period, the report will display the currently excluded receipts by the condition, if the receipt still included uninvoiced quantity and/or amounts on the last day of the selected period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po630500 section This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500) This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. The data in the report is grouped by the account and subaccount used to accumulate the value of the purchased goods. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Account The account used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify an account or leave the field blank to view data for all accounts.
Subaccount The subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify a subaccount or leave the field blank to view data for all subaccounts.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.

Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.

To period You can simulate accrual details on purchase order receipts by the To period option. When earlier periods are chosen as this period, the report will display the currently excluded receipts by the condition, if the receipt still included uninvoiced quantity and/or amounts on the last day of the selected period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-allocated-and-back-ordered-po622000 section This report displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000) This report displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. This report, generated for a certain time period, for each item (listed on a receipt) provides you with detailed information on related inventory allocations or information on the linked sales order lines (those that were marked for purchasing and for which the purchase orders were generated) and, if the **Include back-ordered items received** check box is selected, on the lines of sales orders in the **Open** and **Back order** statuses and on uncompleted transfer orders. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier the report will cover. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Include back-ordered items received When this check box is selected, include information on the received items that are listed on sales orders with the Open and Back order statuses and also on uncompleted transfer orders will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-details-po632000 section This report displays, for the selected financial period, summary information about the invoiced quantities and invoiced amounts for the released purchase receipts and information about adjustments made for returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000) This report displays, for the selected financial period, summary information about the invoiced quantities and invoiced amounts for the released purchase receipts and information about adjustments made for returns. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Post period The financial period for which you want to view invoicing details about the released receipts or returns. The post period is not required if you select a particular receipt by its reference number in the Receipt number element.
Receipt number The reference number of the released purchase receipt or return document. Specify a reference number, or leave the field blank to view a wider range of data.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.

Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.

Detailed When this check box is selected, the report will be generated with information about particular invoices linked to the listed purchase receipts and particular adjustments linked to returns.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-summary-po631500 section This report displays summary information about the invoices linked to the purchase receipts and the adjustments linked to returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500) This report displays summary information about the invoices linked to the purchase receipts and the adjustments linked to returns. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.

Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-details-by-supplier-po621000 section This report displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000) This report displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. The data in the report is grouped by the supplier for which the purchase receipts were created. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.

Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item ID of the purchased item. Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt history (PO643000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-history-po643000 section You use this report to view, print, and email the data on receipts for each normal or drop-ship purchase order created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt history (PO643000) You use this report to view, print, and email the data on receipts for each normal or drop-ship purchase order created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of purchase order, Normal or Drop- ship, you want to view in the report.
Order no.

The number of the order to be displayed in the report.

Select an order number to display only this order, or leave the field blank if you want to view a broader range of data.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Purchase receipt summary (PO620500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-summary-po620500 section This report displays the summary information about the purchase receipts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt summary (PO620500) This report displays the summary information about the purchase receipts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The information is detailed up to the total quantity, lines total, and VAT total for each purchase receipt included in the report. The report includes total values (for all purchase receipts in the report) on received quantities, lines totals, and VAT total. The records in the reports are grouped by the currency used in the purchase receipt documents, and totals are calculated in each currency used. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase receipt information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)
Historical purchase receipt accrual summary (PO63050S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/historical-purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po63050s section This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Historical purchase receipt accrual summary (PO63050S) This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. The data in the report is grouped by the account and subaccount used to accumulate the value of the purchased goods. Purchase receipt simulated accrual summary has added possibility for historical reconciliation of PO accruals by collecting all the data of the changes and enabling to fetch and simulate the uninvoiced quantity and uninvoiced amounts from the purchase receipt documents. Documents will be displayed in the report showcasing uninvoiced amount and uninvoiced quantity held in the document by the end of selected To period. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Account The account used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify an account or leave the field blank to view data for all accounts.
Subaccount The subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify a subaccount or leave the field blank to view data for all subaccounts.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.

Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.

To period You can simulate accrual details on purchase receipts by the To period option. The report can display the already excluded receipts by this condition; if the receipt had uninvoiced quantity and/or amounts on the last day of the selected period, the document will be included with the uninvoiced values displayed in the report as they were by the end of the selected to period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/)